WO2019004072A1 - Field-sequential image display apparatus and image display method - Google Patents

Field-sequential image display apparatus and image display method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019004072A1
WO2019004072A1 PCT/JP2018/023769 JP2018023769W WO2019004072A1 WO 2019004072 A1 WO2019004072 A1 WO 2019004072A1 JP 2018023769 W JP2018023769 W JP 2018023769W WO 2019004072 A1 WO2019004072 A1 WO 2019004072A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
light source
period
color
lighting
subframe period
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2018/023769
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
正益 小林
Original Assignee
シャープ株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by シャープ株式会社 filed Critical シャープ株式会社
Publication of WO2019004072A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019004072A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/34Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
    • G09G3/3406Control of illumination source
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/34Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/34Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
    • G09G3/36Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an image display apparatus, and more particularly, to a field sequential image display apparatus and an image display method.
  • a field sequential image display apparatus that displays a plurality of subframes in one frame period.
  • a typical field sequential image display apparatus includes backlights including red, green and blue light sources, and displays red, green and blue subframes in one frame period.
  • the display panel is driven based on red image data, and a red light source emits light.
  • the green and blue subframes are displayed in a similar manner.
  • the three subframes displayed in time division are synthesized by the afterimage phenomenon on the retina of the observer and are recognized as one color image by the observer.
  • each sub-frame period when the light source of the color corresponding to the sub-frame period starts lighting before the writing of the pixel data representing the image to be displayed to the display device (for example, liquid crystal panel) is completed, the next sub A color corresponding to the frame period will be mixed in the display image (hereinafter, this phenomenon is referred to as “mixed color due to pixel data write timing”).
  • this phenomenon is referred to as “mixed color due to pixel data write timing”.
  • a display device with a slow optical response is used as in a liquid crystal display device
  • lighting of a light source of a color corresponding to the subframe period is started until the response is completed in each subframe period.
  • the color corresponding to the next sub-frame period will be mixed in the display image (hereinafter, this phenomenon is referred to as “color mixing due to optical response”).
  • color mixing due to optical response In this way, when the corresponding colors are mixed in the subframe periods adjacent to each other, the saturation falls or the hue shifts in the display image.
  • Patent Document 1 describes that in a time division color display device (field sequential type image display device), an image signal is written from the upper part of the screen by line sequential writing to a liquid crystal panel.
  • a driving method is described in which the light source corresponding to the color of the written image signal is turned on after blanking for the response time of the liquid crystal after writing up to the point (see paragraph [0060] of the same document, FIG. 8). .
  • each frame period includes a plurality of subframe periods each including a plurality of primary color subframe periods corresponding to a plurality of primary colors and a common color subframe period.
  • a device A light source unit including a plurality of light sources emitting light in the plurality of primary colors; A light modulation unit that transmits or reflects light from the light source unit; A light source unit driving circuit for driving the light source unit such that light of a corresponding color is emitted to the light modulation unit in each subframe period; A light modulation unit driving circuit for controlling the transmittance or the reflectance of the light modulation unit so that an image of a corresponding color is displayed in each subframe period;
  • the light source unit drive circuit is configured to start lighting the light source of the first primary color corresponding to the preceding subframe period which is the immediately preceding subframe period in the common color subframe period from the start point of the common color subframe period And the time from the start of the subsequent subframe period which is a subframe period
  • Preferred configurations of the above embodiments receive substantially the input light data corresponding to a plurality of primary colors, and substantially change in transmittance or reflectance in the light modulation section when switching from the preceding subframe period to the common color subframe period. From the input image data so that the transmittance or the reflectance in the light modulation section does not substantially change or increase when switching from the common color subframe period to the subsequent subframe period.
  • the light modulation unit driving circuit further displays an image of a corresponding color in each subframe period based on the driving image data. Control the transmittance or reflectance of the light modulation unit.
  • Another embodiment of the present invention is an image display device including a light source unit including a plurality of light sources emitting light of a plurality of primary colors, and a light modulation unit transmitting or reflecting light from the light source unit.
  • An image display method for displaying a color image according to a field sequential method in which each frame period includes a plurality of sub-frame periods consisting of a plurality of primary color sub-frame periods and a common color sub-frame period respectively corresponding to the plurality of primary colors.
  • the light source unit driving step when the light source of the first primary color corresponding to the preceding subframe period which is the immediately preceding subframe period in the common color subframe period from the start point of the common color subframe period starts lighting And the time from the start of the subsequent subframe period which is a subframe period immediately after the common color subframe period to the time when the light source of the corresponding second primary color starts lighting in the subsequent subframe period Of at least one of the plurality of primary colors from a start point of a primary color sub-frame period corresponding to another primary color other than the first and second primary colors to a time point when the light source starts lighting in the primary color
  • the light source unit is driven to be shorter than time.
  • the response of the light modulation unit when switching from the preceding subframe period to the common color subframe period, the response of the light modulation unit becomes a decay response. Even if the light source of the first primary color (the light source of the primary color corresponding to the preceding subframe period) is turned on, problems such as saturation reduction and hue shift do not occur. Also, when switching from the common color sub-frame period to the subsequent sub-frame period, the optical response of the light modulation unit becomes a rise response, so the light source of the second primary color in the subsequent sub-frame period Even if the light source of the primary color is turned on, color mixing does not occur. Therefore, the luminance of each color can be improved without causing problems such as saturation reduction and hue shift.
  • Timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for explaining the operation of the image display apparatus as the second prior art for comparison with the image display apparatus according to the first modification of the first embodiment and lighting of each light source It is a figure (B) which shows time.
  • Timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for demonstrating operation
  • a figure (B) which shows lighting time and light-emission quantity of each light source.
  • Timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for explaining the operation of the image display apparatus as the third prior art for comparison with the image display apparatus according to the second modification of the first embodiment and lighting of each light source It is a figure (B) which shows time.
  • a timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for demonstrating the operation
  • a timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for demonstrating the operation
  • Timing chart and waveform diagrams A) for demonstrating operation
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the image display apparatus according to the first embodiment.
  • the image display device 1 shown in FIG. 1 includes an image data conversion unit 10 and a display unit 20.
  • the image data conversion unit 10 includes a parameter storage unit 11, a statistical value / saturation operation unit 12, a distribution ratio / coefficient operation unit 13, and a drive image data operation unit 33.
  • the display unit 20 includes a liquid crystal panel 24 as a light modulation unit, a backlight 25 as a light source unit, a timing control circuit 21, a panel drive circuit 22 as a light modulation unit drive circuit, and a backlight drive as a light source unit drive circuit.
  • a circuit 23 is included.
  • the image display device 1 is a field sequential liquid crystal display device.
  • the image display device 1 divides one frame period into a plurality of subframe periods, and displays subframes of different colors in each subframe period.
  • the image display device 1 divides one frame period into four subframe periods, and displays green, red, white, and blue subframes respectively in the first to fourth subframe periods (see FIG. See FIG. 7 below).
  • the white subframes become the common color subframes.
  • the “color” in each sub-frame refers to the light source color
  • the display unit 20 of the image display device 1 uses “red”, “green”, and “blue” as light source drive data for driving the backlight 25. It is assumed that "white” which is a desired color temperature can be displayed when 1 "(maximum value) is given (the same applies to other embodiments described later).
  • Input image data D1 including image data of red, green, and blue is input to the image display device 1.
  • the image data conversion unit 10 obtains driving image data D2 corresponding to the green, red, white, and blue sub-frames based on the input image data D1.
  • this process is referred to as “image data conversion process”
  • the drive image data D2 corresponding to the green, red, white, and blue sub-frames are “green, red, and so on included in the drive image data D2, respectively. It is called "white and blue image data”.
  • the display unit 20 displays green, red, white, and blue sub-frames in one frame period based on the driving image data D2.
  • the timing control circuit 21 outputs a timing control signal TC to the panel drive circuit 22 and the backlight drive circuit 23.
  • the panel drive circuit 22 drives the liquid crystal panel 24 based on the timing control signal TC and the drive image data D2.
  • the backlight drive circuit 23 drives the backlight 25 based on the timing control signal TC and a parameter WBR, which will be described later, from the parameter storage unit 11.
  • the liquid crystal panel 24 includes a plurality of pixels 26 arranged in a two-dimensional manner.
  • the backlight 25 includes a red light source 27r, a green light source 27g, and a blue light source 27b (in the following, these light sources 27r, 27g, and 27b are also referred to as "three primary color light sources”. It is also called ").
  • the backlight 25 may include a white light source.
  • panel drive circuit 22 drives liquid crystal panel 24 based on green image data included in drive image data D2, and backlight drive circuit 23
  • the green light source 27g is made to emit light.
  • the green sub-frame is displayed.
  • red sub-frame period Tr panel drive circuit 22 drives liquid crystal panel 24 based on red image data included in drive image data D2, and backlight drive circuit 23
  • the red light source 27r is made to emit light. Thereby, a red sub-frame is displayed.
  • panel drive circuit 22 drives liquid crystal panel 24 based on the white image data included in drive image data D2, and backlight drive circuit 23
  • the red light source 27r, the green light source 27g, and the blue light source 27b are made to emit light. Thereby, a white sub-frame is displayed.
  • the backlight drive circuit 23 may cause the white light source to emit light in the third subframe period.
  • panel drive circuit 22 drives liquid crystal panel 24 based on blue image data included in drive image data D2, and backlight drive circuit 23
  • the blue light source 27b is made to emit light. This causes blue sub-frames to be displayed.
  • the image data of red, green, and blue as primary color components included in the input image data D1 is luminance data normalized to a value of 0 or more and 1 or less.
  • the pixel 26 is achromatic.
  • the white, red, green, and blue image data included in the driving image data D2 are also luminance data normalized to a value of 0 or more and 1 or less.
  • the image data conversion unit 10 uses, for example, a microcomputer (hereinafter abbreviated as a "microcomputer") including a CPU (central processing unit) and a memory, and the microcomputer executes a predetermined program corresponding to FIG. 3 described later. It can be realized by software. Instead of this, it is also possible to realize part or all of the image data conversion unit 10 as dedicated hardware (typically, an application specific integrated circuit designed specifically for exclusive use).
  • the blue, green, and red values of each pixel of the image (input image) represented by the input image data D1 are coefficients to be multiplied.
  • the BGR pixel data values of the input image subjected to the amplification compression processing are pixel data values of white, red, green, and blue subframes (hereinafter referred to as “driving Color component conversion processing (hereinafter referred to as equations (5a) to (5d)).
  • white image data (values distributed to the common color sub-frames) included in the drive image data D2 is determined in the range of 0 or more and 1 or less. Further, in this image data conversion processing, for each pixel of the input image, a ratio of the display light amount to be emitted in the white subframe period Tw to the display light amount of the white component to be emitted in one frame period to display the pixel (“ The distribution ratio WRs of white subframes or “common color distribution ratio WRs” or simply “distribution ratio WRs” is determined first, and WGBR pixel data values for driving white image data etc. based on the distribution ratio WRs. Is required.
  • the adjustment factor Ks is set to 1 and the distribution ratio WRs is set to 0.6.
  • the white image data contained in the image data D2 is 0.3.
  • the parameter storage unit 11 stores parameters WRX, RA, RB, and WBR used in image data conversion processing.
  • the statistical value / saturation calculation unit 12 obtains the maximum value Dmax, the minimum value Dmin, and the saturation S for each pixel based on the input image data D1.
  • the distribution ratio / coefficient calculation unit 13 obtains the distribution ratio WRs and the adjustment coefficient (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “coefficient”) Ks based on the maximum value Dmax and the saturation S and the parameters WRX, RA, RB, WBR (Details Is mentioned later).
  • the drive image data calculation unit 33 obtains the drive image data D2 based on the input image data D1, the minimum value Dmin, the distribution ratio WRs, the coefficient Ks, and the parameter WBR.
  • the parameter WRX is a parameter according to the response characteristic of the pixel 26 included in the display unit 20.
  • the parameter WRX is included in the formula for determining the distribution ratio WRs.
  • the parameter WBR specifies the luminance of the light source 27 included in the backlight 25 when displaying a white subframe, and takes a value within the range of 0 ⁇ WBR ⁇ 1.
  • the luminance of the light source 27 when displaying a white subframe is controlled to WBR times the luminance of the light source 27 when displaying another subframe.
  • the minimum value in one frame period of the driving image data D2 is DDmin, and the maximum value is DDmax.
  • the distribution ratio / coefficient operation unit 13 obtains the coefficient Ks so as to satisfy the following equation (1) according to the parameters RA and RB stored in the parameter storage unit 11. DDmax ⁇ RA ⁇ DDmin + RB (1)
  • RB 1-RA
  • the range satisfying the equation (1) is the hatched portion shown in FIG.
  • the parameters RA and RB designate the range of the maximum value DDmax according to the minimum value DDmin.
  • one frame period is determined by determining the range of the maximum value in one frame period of the drive image data in accordance with the minimum value in one frame period of the drive image data. It is possible to suppress the change of the image data after conversion and improve the color reproducibility.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the image data conversion process.
  • the process shown in FIG. 3 is performed on the data of each pixel included in the input image data D1.
  • the red, green and blue image data (BGR pixel data value of the input image) of a certain pixel included in the input image data D1 are respectively included in Ri, Gi, Bi, and the drive image data D2
  • Wd, Bd, Gd, and Rd be the white, blue, green, and red image data (WBGR pixel data values for driving), respectively, and the process for the three-color image data Ri, Gi, and Bi will be described.
  • image data Ri, Gi, Bi of three colors are input to the image data conversion unit 10 (step S101).
  • the statistical value / saturation calculation unit 12 obtains the maximum value Dmax and the minimum value Dmin for the image data Ri, Gi, Bi of three colors (step S102).
  • the statistical value / saturation calculating unit 12 obtains the saturation S according to the following equation (2) based on the maximum value Dmax and the minimum value Dmin (step S103).
  • S (Dmax-Dmin) / Dmax (2)
  • S 0.
  • the distribution ratio / coefficient calculation unit 13 obtains the distribution ratio WRs of the white subframe based on the parameter WRX (step S104).
  • the WRs is not limited to this, and may be a value near 0.5. More generally, the distribution ratio WRs may be WBR / (1 + WBR) or a value in the vicinity thereof (the details will be described later).
  • the distribution ratio / coefficient calculating unit 13 obtains the coefficient Ks according to a calculation formula described later based on the saturation S and the parameters WRX, RA, RB, and WBR (step S105).
  • the distribution ratio / coefficient calculation unit 13 uses the distribution ratio WRs and uses the maximum value Dmax of the input image data D1 as the input image data D1. Under the condition that the possible maximum value is 1, the maximum value (or the value below the maximum value) that the coefficient Ks can take is determined.
  • the drive image data calculation unit 33 performs the following equations (5a) to (5d) Image data Wd, Bd, Gd, Rd of four colors are obtained according to the above (step S106).
  • Wd WRs ⁇ Dmin ⁇ Ks ⁇ PP / WBR (5a)
  • Bd (Bi ⁇ WRs ⁇ Dmin) Ks ⁇ PP (5b)
  • Gd (Gi-WRs.Dmin) Ks.PP
  • Rd (Ri-WRs-Dmin) Ks-PP (5d)
  • the image data conversion unit 10 uses the parameters RA, RB, WRX, and WBR to generate data (data of BGR pixel data of the input image) Ri, Gi, and Bi of each pixel included in the input image data D1.
  • the driving image data D2 is generated by obtaining white, blue, green and red image data (WBGR pixel data values for driving) Wd, Bd, Gd and Rd of the pixel.
  • the parameter WBR for determining the luminance of the light source 27 in the white subframe period Tw is 1 (the luminance of the light source 27 emitting light in the white subframe period Tw is 1 for the light source 27 emitting in other than the white subframe period Tw).
  • the distribution ratio WRs is set to 50% (step S104) or a value in the vicinity thereof. More generally, the distribution ratio WRs in the present embodiment is set as follows.
  • the maximum value of the blue, green and red image data Bd, Gd, Rd included in the driving image data D2 is Ddmax, and the minimum value is Ddmin.
  • PP 1, Wd, Ddmax, and Ddmin are given by the following equations (6a) to (6c), respectively.
  • Wd WRs ⁇ Dmin ⁇ Ks / WBR (6a)
  • Ddmax (Dmax ⁇ WRs ⁇ Dmin) Ks (6b)
  • Ddmin (Dmin-WRs ⁇ Dmin) Ks (6c)
  • the distribution ratio WRs is determined such that Wd ⁇ Ddmin, the transmittance of the liquid crystal decreases when switching from the other subframe period to the white subframe period Tw, and from the white subframe period Tw to the other subframes It rises when switching to a period. As described later, in the present embodiment, this point is used to prevent color mixing due to the optical response. If Wd ⁇ Ddmin is solved using equations (6a) and (6c), the following equation is obtained.
  • the saturation S and the distribution ratio WRs take values of 0 or more and 1 or less.
  • the range of (S, WRs) indicated by the saturation S and the distribution ratio WRs is a first area where Ddmin ⁇ Wd ⁇ Ddmax, a second area where Ddmax ⁇ Wd, and Wd ⁇ It is divided into the 3rd area which becomes Ddmin.
  • the maximum value Dmax is the lightness Vi of the input image data D1.
  • Ks WBR.RB / ⁇ WBR- (WBR + RA) WRs (1-S) ⁇ (25)
  • the backlight 25 is configured using a light emitting diode (LED), but the configuration of the backlight is not limited to this (the same applies to other embodiments).
  • LED light emitting diode
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the backlight drive circuit 23 as a light source drive circuit.
  • the backlight drive circuit 23 includes a lighting control circuit 230 and a backlight power circuit 232.
  • the lighting control circuit 230 includes an LED control circuit 231, a red light source switch 23r, a green light source switch 23g, and a blue light source switch 23b.
  • the LED control circuit 231 generates a red light source control signal CswR, a green light source control signal CswG, and a blue light source control signal CswB based on the timing control signal TC from the timing control circuit 21, and switches the red light source switch 23r for the green light source.
  • the switch 23g and the blue light source switch 23b are respectively provided.
  • the red light source switch 23r is in the on state when the red light source control signal CswR is at the high level (H level), and is in the off state when the red light source control signal CswR is at the low level (L level).
  • the green light source switch 23g is in the on state when the green light source control signal CswG is at the H level, and is in the off state when the green light source control signal CswG is at the L level.
  • the blue light source switch 23b is on when the blue light source control signal CswB is at the H level, and is off when the blue light source control signal CswB is at the L level.
  • the red light source 27r, the green light source 27g, and the blue light source 27b in the backlight 25 are connected to the backlight power circuit 232 via the red light source switch 23r, the green light source switch 23g, and the blue light source switch 23b.
  • the red light source drive signal SdvR, the green light source drive signal SdvG, and the blue light source drive signal SdvB are supplied as drive signals to the red light source 27r, the green light source 27g, and the blue light source 27b.
  • the red light source 27r is on when the red light source control signal CswR is H level and off when L level
  • the green light source 27g is on when the green light source control signal CswG is H level and off when L level
  • the blue light source 27b is in the on state when the blue light source control signal CswB is at the H level, and in the off state when the blue light source control signal CswB is at the L level.
  • FIG. 6 shows a conventional field sequential liquid crystal display device (hereinafter referred to as “conventional image display device” or “first method”) having a backlight drive circuit similar to the backlight drive circuit 23 configured as shown in FIG. It is a timing chart for explaining the driving of the backlight in the “conventional example”.
  • driving of the backlight in the first conventional example will be described as a comparative example.
  • the same or corresponding parts as in the image display device according to the present embodiment are given the same reference numerals.
  • each subframe period Tg, Tr, Tw, Tb is a turn-off period Toff during which light is not irradiated from the backlight 25 to the liquid crystal panel 24.
  • the second half is a backlight 25 is a lighting period Ton during which light is emitted to the liquid crystal panel 24.
  • the symbol "Cft" in FIG. 6 indicates a subframe indication signal included in the timing control signal TC supplied from the timing control circuit 21 to the LED control circuit 231 (the same applies to FIG. 7).
  • the backlight drive circuit 23 selectively drives the red light source 27r, the green light source 27g, and the blue light source 27b in the backlight 25 in accordance with the red light source control signal CswR, the green light source control signal CswG, and the blue light source control signal CswB. As can be seen from the waveforms of the light source control signals CswR, CswG, CswB shown in FIG.
  • the green light source control signal CswG is a pulse width modulated signal so that the green light source 27g lights up with a desired light emission intensity.
  • a green image is generated in the green subframe period Tg based on the input signal Din.
  • a red image is displayed in the red subframe period Tr
  • a white image is displayed in the white subframe period Tw
  • a blue image is displayed in the blue subframe period Tb
  • a color image by additive color mixture over time is displayed on the liquid crystal panel 24. Be done.
  • the details of the display operation in such a first conventional example will be described later (see FIG. 8).
  • FIG. 7 is a timing chart for explaining the driving of the backlight 25 in the present embodiment.
  • the light-off period Toff during which light is not emitted from the light 25 to the liquid crystal panel 24 is a lighting period Ton during which light is emitted from the backlight 25 to the liquid crystal panel 24 in the second half.
  • the corresponding light sources are lit in both the first half and the second half.
  • the respective pixel data constituting D 2 are sequentially written to the liquid crystal panel 24.
  • the backlight drive circuit 23 selectively drives the red light source 27r, the green light source 27g, and the blue light source 27b in the backlight 25 in accordance with the red light source control signal CswR, the green light source control signal CswG, and the blue light source control signal CswB.
  • the red light source control signal CswR, CswG, and CswB shown in FIG. 7 only the green light source 27g is used in the green subframe period Tg as the first subframe period, and the red subframe period Tr as the second subframe period.
  • the red light source 27r is turned on, and only the blue light source 27b is turned on in the blue sub-frame period Tb as the fourth sub-frame period, and in the white sub-frame period Tw as the third sub-frame period
  • the light source 27r is turned on, and the red light source 27r, the green light source 27g, and the blue light source 27b are simultaneously turned on in the second half period.
  • green light, red light, white light and blue light are respectively irradiated to the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 24 in the green subframe period Tg, the red subframe period Tr, the white subframe period Tw and the blue subframe period Tb.
  • the light emission color of the backlight 25 is slightly shifted in the red direction from white (hereinafter referred to as “white in white display”) displayed when the input image data D1 for white display is given. (Details will be described later).
  • driving of the liquid crystal panel 24 (writing of pixel data to each pixel formation unit 30) and driving of the backlight 25 allow the green sub-frame period Tg based on the input signal Din.
  • the green image is displayed in the red subframe period Tr
  • the white image is displayed in the white subframe period Tw
  • the blue image is displayed in the blue subframe period Tb. Is displayed on the liquid crystal panel 24. Details of the display operation in this embodiment will be described later (see FIG. 9).
  • red light emitting diode hereinafter referred to as "R-LED”
  • red light source 27r a green light emitting diode
  • G-LED green light source
  • blue light source 27b a blue light emitting diode
  • R-LED red light emitting diode
  • B-LED blue light emitting diode
  • FIG. 8A is a timing chart and waveform diagram for explaining the display operation of the first conventional example in which the backlight 25 is driven as shown in FIG. 6, and FIG. 8B shows the first example. It is a figure which shows the lighting time of each light source (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in a prior art example.
  • R-LED light source
  • G-LED G-LED
  • B-LED light source
  • the response of liquid crystal (temporal change in transmittance) is indicated by a thick dotted line.
  • the lighting time is shown as a relative value (duty ratio) in which the length of one frame period Tfr is "1"
  • the "primary color subframe period” means a red subframe period Tr, a green subframe period. It is a generic term for Tg and blue subframe period Tb.
  • the above expression method in FIG. 8 is also adopted in FIGS. 9 and 14 to 29.
  • the ratio of the lighting time of three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in one frame period (that is, the ratio of the duty ratio) is 1: 2/3: 1 (
  • Each light source (R-) is set such that the ratio of the lighting time (ratio of duty ratio) of the three primary color light sources for white balance is 1: 2/3: 1 (see “TOTAL” in FIG. 8B). It is assumed that current values at the time of lighting of the LED, G-LED, and B-LED are set in advance.
  • the central time of each sub-frame period (the time corresponding to 50% of one sub-frame period) is preset as the light emission control reference time point tecr, and in the first conventional example, the light source is turned on in each sub-frame period When it does, lighting is started from this light emission control reference time point tecr.
  • the period (first half period) before the light emission control reference time point tecr in each subframe period includes the period in which the response of the liquid crystal is in the transition state (transition state), and light emission from the start point in each subframe period Until the control reference time point tecr is the time to suppress the lighting of the light source.
  • the light emission control reference time point tecr is set to an end time point of time in which the light emission of the light source is to be suppressed from the viewpoint of the response characteristic of the liquid crystal in each sub-frame period, it is not limited thereto.
  • the time from the light emission control reference time point tecr to the end point in the subframe period corresponds to the maximum light source lighting time.
  • the maximum light source lighting time corresponds to the maximum lighting time that can be secured in each sub-frame period while avoiding the color mixing hue shift due to the response characteristic of the liquid crystal.
  • the light emission control reference time point tecr is set from such a viewpoint. Also in the following, the central time of each subframe period (the time corresponding to 50% of one subframe period) is used as the light emission control reference time point tecr, but the light emission control reference time point tecr is limited to this. However, it should be determined in consideration of the response characteristics of the liquid crystal, the writing speed of the pixel data to the liquid crystal panel 24, and the like.
  • FIG. 9A is a timing chart and a waveform diagram for explaining the display operation in the present embodiment in which the backlight 25 is driven as shown in FIG. 7, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the lighting time and light-emission quantity of each primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED).
  • the ratio of the lighting time of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in one frame period Tfr is 1.5: 1: 1.5 (see FIG. 9B).
  • the hour current value is preset.
  • the backlight 25 is driven according to the red light source control signal CswR, the green light source control signal CswG, and the blue light source control signal CswB shown in FIG. 7, and the panel is driven based on the drive image data D2 described above.
  • the liquid crystal panel 24 is driven by the circuit 22, as shown in FIG. 9A, the light sources 27r, 27g and 27b in the backlight 25 are turned on, and the liquid crystal in the liquid crystal panel 24 responds.
  • the bar graph in the lower part of FIG. 9B shows the light emission amount of each of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in the white subframe period Tw (W-SF) in one frame period Tfr. , And the amount of light emission of each of the three primary color light sources in one frame period Tfr (TOTAL).
  • TOTAL the amount of light emission of each of the three primary color light sources in one frame period
  • the red light source 27r when the input image data D1 indicating red display is given, the red light source 27r is turned on in the first half of the white sub-frame period Tw, as shown in the waveform diagram in the lower part of FIG.
  • the amount of light emitted per light source (LED) is increased more than in the first conventional example while suppressing the hue shift.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display operation when the color to be displayed (hereinafter referred to as “target color”) is changed in the image display device according to the present embodiment.
  • a display operation (a response state of a liquid crystal and an operation state of an LED as a light source), and a white color is set as a target color in a conventional image display device having a distribution ratio WRs of 100% as a comparative example.
  • the drive image data and display operation (hereinafter referred to as "case (10)") are also shown.
  • thick dotted lines in the waveform diagram showing display operation indicate the response of liquid crystal (temporal change of transmittance).
  • the primary color sub-frame period (following sub-frame period) which is the same as or smaller than the value of the red image data Rd as driving image data of the period Tr and immediately after the white sub-frame period
  • the value is the same as or smaller than the value of the blue image data Bd as driving image data of the blue subframe period Tb.
  • the liquid crystal response (optical response of the liquid crystal panel 24) in this embodiment is white from the red subframe period (preceding subframe period) Tr. Whenever it switches to a subframe period (common color subframe period) Tw, it becomes a decay response, and when it switches from a white subframe period (common color subframe period) Tw to a blue subframe period (following subframe period) Tb, it always becomes a rise response. Become.
  • a red light source which is a light source of a color corresponding to a red subframe period Tr as a preceding subframe period in the white subframe period Tw as a common color subframe period.
  • the relative time (the time based on the start point t3 of the white subframe period) at which the 27r (R-LED) starts lighting is a green subframe that is a primary color subframe period other than the preceding subframe period and the subsequent subframe period. It is earlier than the relative time (lighting start time tecr with reference to the start point t1 in the green subframe period Tg) that the light source 27g (G-LED) starts lighting in the period Tg. Further, as shown in FIG.
  • the relative time (light source point in the blue subframe period t4) at which the light source 27b (B-LED) starts lighting in the blue subframe period Tb as the subsequent subframe period is used as a reference.
  • Time is a relative time (lighting start time in the green subframe period Tg) at which the light source 27g (G-LED) starts lighting in the green subframe period Tg which is a primary color subframe period other than the preceding subframe period and the subsequent subframe period It is earlier than the lighting start time tecr) based on t1.
  • the response of the liquid crystal becomes a decay response. Even if the red light source (R-LED) is turned on in the first half of the period Tw, problems such as saturation reduction and hue shift do not occur. Also, when switching from the white subframe period Tw (common color subframe period) to the blue subframe period Tb (following subframe period), the response of the liquid crystal is a rise response, so the blue light source Even if the B-LED) lights up, color mixing does not occur.
  • the present embodiment it is possible to improve the luminance of each color without causing problems such as saturation reduction and hue shift.
  • the time gap between light sources of the respective colors each color LED
  • the time gap for light emission from the backlight 25 is reduced
  • the display brightness can be improved without increasing the number of light sources (LEDs).
  • the ratio of the amount of display light to be emitted in the white subframe period Tw to the amount of display light of the white component to be emitted in one frame period Tfr for displaying each pixel of the input image that is, the distribution ratio WRs is It is determined by the value of the parameter WRX and is 50% (see step S104 in FIG. 3).
  • the parameter WBR for determining the luminance of the light source 27 in the white subframe period is assumed to be 1. More generally, the value to be set as the distribution ratio WRs is WBR / (1 + WBR).
  • the distribution ratio WRs may be set to a fixed value near 50% (more generally, a fixed value near WBR / (1 + WBR)) by setting the parameter WRX. If the distribution ratio WRs is within a predetermined range near 50%, the response of the liquid crystal is substantially a decay response when switching from the preceding subframe period (red subframe period Tr) to the common color subframe period (white subframe period Tw) Even if the red light source (R-LED) is turned on in the first half of the common color sub-frame period (white sub-frame period Tw) and a color shift occurs, it is within the human visual tolerance.
  • the distribution ratio WRs is within a predetermined range around 50% where color shift can be tolerated by human vision (more generally, within a predetermined range near WBR / (1 + WBR)). It may change according to the saturation or the lightness.
  • a predetermined range around 50% where color shift can be tolerated by human vision more generally, within a predetermined range near WBR / (1 + WBR). It may change according to the saturation or the lightness.
  • the image display apparatus is provided with the distribution ratio WRs not as a fixed value (WRX ⁇ 50%) but as a function that changes according to the saturation S or the lightness, but the other configuration is the first embodiment. It is similar to the form, and has a configuration as shown in FIG. In the following, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present modification, the same reference numerals are given to portions that are the same as or correspond to the configuration of the image display device according to the first embodiment.
  • the distribution ratio WRs as a function of the saturation S will be described as a first example.
  • first distribution ratio WRs1 in order to distinguish the distribution ratio of the first example from the distribution ratio of another example, it is also referred to as “first distribution ratio WRs1”.
  • the saturation S and the distribution ratio WRs take values of 0 or more and 1 or less.
  • the maximum value of the blue, green and red image data Bd, Gd, Rd included in the driving image data D2 is Ddmax, and the minimum value is Ddmin.
  • Wd WRs ⁇ Dmin ⁇ Ks / WBR (6a)
  • Ddmax (Dmax ⁇ WRs ⁇ Dmin) Ks (6b)
  • Ddmin (Dmin-WRs ⁇ Dmin) Ks (6c)
  • the following equation (7a) is derived.
  • FIG. 11 is a graph showing the first distribution ratio WRs1.
  • the latter function is determined such that the graph of the former function and the graph of the latter function are in contact at a point (WBRx, WBRo / (1-WBRx)).
  • the graph shown in FIG. 11 is always in the first area shown in FIG.
  • a distribution ratio WRs which is a function of lightness after amplification and compression, will be described as a second example.
  • Dmax indicates the input lightness Vi
  • V indicates the lightness after the amplification and compression processing (hereinafter also referred to as “adjusted lightness”).
  • the parameter storage unit 11 stores the parameter WRZ in addition to the parameters RA, RB, WRX, and WBR described above, and the statistical value / saturation calculation unit 12 calculates the first distribution ratio WRs1. And the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is calculated using the parameter WRZ.
  • WRsva RA / (RA-1) + (RB-V) / ⁇ (RA-1) V (1-S) ⁇ (27a)
  • WRsvb WBR.RA / (1 + WBR.RA) + WBR.RB / ⁇ (1 + WBR.RA) V (1-S) ⁇ (27b)
  • WRsvc WBR (V-RB) / ⁇ (WBR + RA) V (1-S) ⁇ (27 c)
  • the second distribution ratio WRsv2 When the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is obtained, if (S, WRs1) is in the first area shown in FIG. 4, the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is set to the value WRsva or more shown in the equation (27a). When (S, WRs1) is in the second area shown in FIG. 4, the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is set to the value WRsvb or less shown in the equation (27b). If (S, WRs1) is in the third area shown in FIG. 4, the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is set to the value WRsvc or more shown in the equation (27c).
  • the second distribution ratio WRsv2 takes a value in the range of 0 ⁇ WRsv2 ⁇ 1
  • the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is determined to satisfy the following equation (28). max (0, WRsva, WRsvc) WR WRsv 2 min min (1, WRsvb) (28)
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram for describing a method of determining a function for obtaining the second distribution ratio WRsv2.
  • RA 0.25
  • RB 0.75
  • WBR 0.5
  • WRX 0.75.
  • the distribution ratio / coefficient calculation unit 13 calculates the first distribution ratio WRs1 according to the equations (8a) to (8c), and calculates the coefficient Ks according to the equation (21).
  • a portion surrounded by a thick broken line in FIG. 12 indicates the range of the adjusted brightness (brightness after amplification and compression processing) V and the second distribution ratio WRsv2 that satisfy Expression (28).
  • the function for obtaining the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is determined such that the graph of the function is in the range surrounded by the thick broken line shown in FIG.
  • the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is larger as the adjustment brightness V is smaller. Therefore, in the second example in which the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is set to the distribution ratio WRs to the white subframe, the distribution ratio / coefficient calculating unit 13 obtains a larger distribution ratio WRs as the adjustment brightness V decreases. Therefore, when the adjustment brightness V is small, the color break reduction effect can be increased.
  • the parameter WRZ is set to a value closer to the first distribution ratio WRs1 as the response speed of the pixel 26 is slower, and the parameter WRZ is set to a value closer to 1 as the response speed of the pixel 26 is faster.
  • the parameter WRZ is set to a predetermined value near the first distribution ratio WRs1, for example.
  • the lighting time of the red light source (R-LED) in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period is the time from the light emission control reference time point tecr in the white subframe period Tw to the end point t4 Since the time corresponding to the second half period, ie, the time Ton that can be regarded as the conventional maximum light source lighting time, is longer, the light source 27b in the blue subframe period Tb as the subsequent subframe period is It is preferable to increase the lighting time of In the present embodiment, as described above, the light source 27b (B-LED) is lit in the blue subframe period Tb, not only in the second half period (tecr to t5) but also in the first half period (t4 to tecr). The configuration from the viewpoint of maintaining the white balance is already included (see FIG. 9A).
  • the lighting time of the red light source 27r is longer in the white subframe period Tw and the lighting time of the blue light source 27b (B-LED) is longer in the blue subframe period Tb.
  • the color reproduction range can be expanded by suppressing the reduction in color and the hue shift, and the all display color luminance can be improved.
  • the liquid crystal response becomes a decay response or a rise response when switching from the blue subframe period Tb to the green subframe period Tg depends on the input image data D1. Therefore, in the green subframe period Tg, unlike the white subframe period Tw and the blue subframe period Tb, the light source 27g (G-LED) is not lit in the first half period (before the light emission control reference time point tecr). It is done.
  • each light source is preset with a current to be supplied at the time of lighting so that white balance can be secured without lighting the light source 27g (during a period in which light should not be turned on) (see FIG. 9B) .
  • the current setting for each light source R-LED, G-LED, B-LED
  • the current setting corresponding to the lighting time of each light source shown in (B) is not necessarily required.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the method of compensating for the deviation of the mixed color hue in the present embodiment, and the circle in FIG. 13 shows the color wheel.
  • the hue changes in the circumferential direction
  • "R", “G” and “B” indicate angular positions corresponding to red, green and blue, respectively
  • "C” and “M” , “Y” indicate angular positions corresponding to cyan, magenta and yellow, respectively.
  • the positions in the color wheel of the target color of the cases (1) to (9) shown in FIG. 10 are indicated by “(1)” to “(9)”.
  • the luminance of each color can be improved while suppressing the saturation decrease and the hue shift, but as can be seen from the waveform diagram (waveform of thick dotted line) showing the display operation in FIG. Due to the response characteristics of the liquid crystal, a slight shift occurs in saturation and hue from the target colors of cases (1) to (9).
  • Arrows attached in the vicinity of “(1)” to “(9)” in FIG. 13 indicate the directions of these deviations, that is, the display colors corresponding to the respective target colors of cases (1) to (9) are relevant. It indicates the direction of movement from the chromaticity point of the target color. In FIG.
  • the duty ratio (ratio of lighting time in one frame period) of each of the light sources 27r, 27g, 27b in the primary color subframe period (RGB-SF) and the white subframe period (W-SF) is adjusted. Can maintain the white balance.
  • cases other than the above cases (2), (4) and (7) there may be a case where a shift in saturation occurs in the display color (when an arrow in the radial direction is shown in FIG. 13). There is no deviation. If the movement of the chromaticity point as shown by the arrow in FIG. 13 is within the visual tolerance of human beings, it is not always necessary to perform spectrum setting for compensation of such hue shift for each light source. Absent.
  • the green sub-frame period Tg which is a primary color sub-frame period other than the sub-frame periods (preceding and subsequent sub-frame periods) immediately before and after the common color sub-frame period (white sub-frame period Tw).
  • the light source starts to light at the light emission control reference time point tecr. This means that the light source turns on after the end of the transient state of the liquid crystal response.
  • the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period and the blue subframe period Tb as the subsequent subframe period
  • the light emission control reference time point tecr before conventionally, light emission is suppressed from the viewpoint of liquid crystal response characteristics
  • the lighting of the light source is started within the expected time, which is the feature of the first embodiment.
  • the end time of the light emission suppression period from the viewpoint of the response characteristic of the liquid crystal is set so that the maximum light source lighting time is from the light emission control reference time point tecr to the end point of the subframe period.
  • the light emission control reference time point tecr it may be different from such a setting if the color shift and the decrease of the average light emission amount are within the visual range of human vision.
  • the light source 27b (B-LED) is before the light emission control reference time point tecr in the blue subframe period Tb which is a subsequent subframe period of the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period. Lighting (not only in the second half period but also in the first half period) (see FIGS. 7 and 9), but instead, at the light emission control reference time point tecr in the blue subframe period Tb, the light source 27b (B -LED) may start lighting (it will be in the lighting state only in the second half period).
  • an image display apparatus having such a configuration will be described as a first modified example of the first embodiment.
  • the light source starts lighting at the light emission control reference time point tecr in the blue sub-frame period Tb, but the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present modification, the same reference numerals as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first embodiment denote the same or corresponding parts. 1, 3 and 5).
  • FIG. 15A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification
  • FIG. 15B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification).
  • -LED It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity.
  • FIG. 14 (A) is a timing chart and a waveform diagram for describing a display operation in a conventional example (hereinafter referred to as “second conventional example”) corresponding to the present modification
  • second conventional example hereinafter referred to as “second conventional example”
  • FIG. 14 (B) FIG.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the lighting time of each of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in the conventional example 2;
  • the ratio of the lighting time of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in one frame period Tfr (TOTAL) is 1: 2 in proportion to the ratio of this modification.
  • the third embodiment differs from the first conventional example in which the ratio is 1: 2/3: 1 in that it is 3: 2/3, but the other points are the same as the first conventional example.
  • each light source 27r, 27g , 27b (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are slightly different from the light emission pattern of the first embodiment.
  • the display operation liquid crystal response and LED operation
  • the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period
  • the light source 27r of the primary color corresponding to the preceding subframe period Tr. (R-LED) starts to light up before the light emission control reference time point tecr (lights up not only in the second half period of the white subframe period Tw but also in the first half period) (FIG. 9A, FIG. See A).
  • the ratio of the lighting time of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) for achieving white balance is 1.5: 1: 1.
  • the current values at the time of lighting each of the three primary color light sources are set in advance so that According to such current setting, as understood from the bar graph in FIG. 15B, the emission color of the backlight 25 is slightly shifted from white to red in the white subframe period Tw.
  • the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period starts lighting before the light emission control reference time point tecr.
  • the red light source 27r corresponding to the preceding subframe period Tr may start lighting at the light emission control reference time point tecr (it will be in the lighting state only in the second half period).
  • an image display apparatus having such a configuration will be described as a second modification of the first embodiment.
  • the red light source 27r starts lighting at the light emission control reference time point tecr in the white subframe period Tw, but the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present modification, the same reference numerals as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first embodiment denote the same or corresponding parts. 1, 3 and 5).
  • FIG. 17A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification
  • FIG. 17B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification).
  • -LED It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity.
  • FIG. 16 (A) is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in the conventional example (hereinafter referred to as “third prior art”) corresponding to the present modification
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the lighting time of each of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in the conventional example 3;
  • the ratio of the lighting time of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in one frame period Tfr (TOTAL) is 2/3 in accordance with the ratio of this modified example:
  • the second conventional example differs from the first conventional example in that it is 2/3: 1, but the other points are the same as the first conventional example.
  • the display operation (liquid crystal response and LED operation) is substantially the same as in the first embodiment, and in the blue subframe period Tb as the subsequent subframe period (subframe period immediately after the white subframe period Tw),
  • the light source 27b (B-LED) starts to light up before the light emission control reference time point tecr (the light is on in the first half period as well as the second half period of the blue subframe period Tb) (FIG. 9A, FIG. 17 (A)).
  • the ratio of the lighting time of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) for achieving white balance is 1: 1: 1.5.
  • the current values at the time of lighting each of the three primary color light sources are set in advance so that According to such current setting, as understood from the bar graph in FIG. 17B, the emission color of the backlight 25 is slightly shifted from white to yellow in the white subframe period Tw.
  • FIG. 19A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in the present embodiment
  • FIG. 19B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in the present embodiment).
  • -LED It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity.
  • FIG. 18A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in the conventional example corresponding to the present embodiment
  • FIG. 19B is a three primary color light source (R-LED in this conventional example).
  • G-LED, B-LED is a diagram showing the lighting time of each.
  • This prior art example is the same as the first prior art example shown in FIG.
  • the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period starts lighting before the light emission control reference time point tecr. (Not only in the second half period but also in the first half period) (see FIGS. 7 and 9).
  • the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period Tr lights up at the light emission control reference time point tecr. Start (become lit only in the second half period).
  • the lighting time of the red light source (R-LED) in the white subframe period Tw is the time from the light emission control reference time point tecr in the white subframe period Tw to the end point t4 (white subframe period Length of lighting time of other light source (green light source or blue light source) other than red light source at Tw, or length of lighting time of red light source at white subframe period Tw in the conventional example),
  • the lighting time of the blue light source 27b (B-LED) in the subsequent subframe period Tb has a length corresponding to the lighting time of the red light source in the white subframe period Tw (FIGS. 8 and 9). reference).
  • the lighting time in each subframe period of the green light source 27g (G-LED) corresponding to the primary color subframe period Tg other than the preceding and succeeding subframe periods is white based on the time difference.
  • the length corresponds to the lighting time of the red light source 27r in the subframe period Tw (see FIGS. 8 and 9).
  • the lighting time of the blue light source 27b (B-LED) and the green light source 27g (G-LED) does not increase as described above, and the lighting time of these is similar to that of the conventional example (see FIG. 18, see FIG. 19).
  • the backlight drive circuit 23 in the present embodiment is configured such that the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 operate as described above, but other components in the present embodiment
  • the configuration of is the same as that of the first embodiment. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present embodiment, the same reference numerals as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first embodiment denote the same or corresponding parts. 1, 3 and 5).
  • the current value at the time of lighting of each of the three primary color light sources is preset so that 1: 2/3: 1. According to such current setting, as understood from the bar graph in FIG. 19B, the emission color of the backlight 25 is slightly shifted from white to red in the white subframe period Tw.
  • the red light source 27r (R-LED) is turned on only in the second half period (tecr to t4) in the white subframe period Tw, and the green light source in one frame period Tfr.
  • the lighting time of (G-LED) does not increase and is the same as the first conventional example (see FIG. 18).
  • the light source 27b (B-LED) is not lit at the start point of the blue subframe period Tb, but is lit at time t41 earlier than the light emission control reference time point tecr.
  • the green light source 27g (G-LED) is continuously driven in the lighting period (tecr to t2) in the green subframe period Tg, and the white subframe period is In the lighting period (tecr to t4) at Tw, driving is performed by the pulse width modulation method.
  • the blue light source 27b (B-LED) is also driven continuously in the lighting period (t41 to t5) in the blue subframe period Tb, and driven by the pulse width modulation method in the lighting period (tecr to t4) in the white subframe period Tw. Be done.
  • the time during which the green sub-frame period Tg is on is longer than the time during which the white sub-frame period Tw is on, and the blue light source 27b (B-LED)
  • the single-color luminance can be improved without changing the white luminance, so that the white luminance in the image represented by the input image data D1 is set to the single-color luminance. It is suitable when it becomes large with respect to.
  • the light emission pattern of each light source 27r, 27g, 27b (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) is different from the light emission pattern of the first embodiment, the display operation (liquid crystal response and LED operation) Is similar to that of the first embodiment, and basically the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained.
  • the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are lit in the entire second half period (tecr to t4) in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period. It is in the state.
  • the green light source (G-LED) and the blue light source (B-LED) are driven by the pulse width modulation method in the second half period (tecr to t4) so that the lighting time in one frame period Tfr does not increase ( 19 (A)).
  • FIG. 20A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification
  • FIG. 20B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification).
  • -LED It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity.
  • the configuration other than the configuration relating to driving of the backlight 25 in the present modification is the same as that of the first and second embodiments.
  • the lighting time of the green light source (G-LED) in one frame period Tfr does not increase as in the second embodiment (the conventional example shown in FIG. As well).
  • the green light source 27g (G-LED) and the blue light source 27b (B-LED) are in the white subframe period Tw.
  • the white subframe period Tw is continuously driven in a predetermined period in contact with the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw.
  • the green light source 27g and the blue light source 27b start lighting at time t31 after the light emission control reference time point tecr, and continuously from time t31 to the end point t4 of the white sub-frame period Tw. It lights up.
  • the other operations of the three primary color light sources are the same as in the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 21A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification
  • FIG. 21B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification).
  • -LED It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity.
  • the configuration other than the configuration relating to driving of the backlight 25 in the present modification is the same as that of the first and second embodiments.
  • the lighting time of the green light source (G-LED) in one frame period Tfr does not increase (the conventional example shown in FIG. 18 and the prior art) As well).
  • the green light source 27g (G-LED) and the blue light source 27b (B-LED) are in the white subframe period Tw.
  • the white subframe period Tw is continuously driven in a predetermined period in contact with the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw.
  • the present modification is the same as the first modification of the second embodiment (see FIG. 20). However, as shown in FIG.
  • the red light source 27r (R-LED) is on in the white subframe period Tw.
  • a certain period is divided into a first period (t3 to t31) and a second period (t32 to t4) respectively contacting the start point t3 and the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw.
  • the red light source 27r is astigmatic from the end point t31 of the first period to the start point t32 of the second period.
  • the other operations of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are the same as in the second embodiment.
  • the lighting of the red light source 27r in the white subframe period Tw is performed so that the white color contributing to the reduction of color break in the luminescent color obtained in the white subframe period Tw does not change with respect to white in white display.
  • the periods can be separated into a first period and a second period (see the lower bar in FIG. 21B).
  • the red luminance (monochromatic luminance) as a primary color corresponding to the red subframe period Tr which is the preceding subframe period is further added. It can be improved.
  • FIG. 23A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this embodiment
  • FIG. 23B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this embodiment).
  • -LED It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity.
  • FIG. 22 (A) is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in the conventional example corresponding to the present embodiment
  • FIG. 22 (B) is a three primary color light source (R-LED in this conventional example).
  • G-LED, B-LED is a diagram showing the lighting time of each.
  • This prior art example is the same as the first prior art example shown in FIGS.
  • the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period starts lighting at the light emission control reference time point tecr, and From the start point t3 of the white subframe period Tw to the light emission control reference time point tecr (first half period), the light is not lit (see FIG. 19).
  • the red light source (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period Tr receives the light emission control reference time from its start point t3.
  • the other operations of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 in the present embodiment are the same as those of the second embodiment, and each light source in one frame period Tfr ( The lighting time of the R-LED, G-LED, and B-LED is the same as that of the conventional example without increasing.
  • the second embodiment is also the same as the second embodiment (see FIGS. 22 and 23). Further, as shown in FIG.
  • the backlight drive circuit 23 in the present embodiment is configured such that the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 operate as described above, but other light sources in the present embodiment
  • the configuration is the same as that of the first and second embodiments. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present embodiment, the same reference numerals as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first and second embodiments denote the same or corresponding parts. It abbreviates (refer to Drawing 1, Drawing 3, and Drawing 5).
  • the lighting period of the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period is the first half period
  • the lighting periods of the green light source 27g (G-LED) and the blue light source 27b (B-LED) are only the second half period (tecr to t4). For this reason, the chromaticity point of the common color contributing to the reduction of the color break is shifted from the white in the white display to the cyan direction.
  • the single-color luminance (red Luminance) can be further improved.
  • the single-color luminance can be improved without changing the white luminance, so that in the image represented by the input image data D1, the white luminance is the single-color luminance. It is suitable when it becomes large.
  • each light source 27r, 27g, 27b R-LED, G-LED, B-LED
  • the display operation liquid crystal response and LED operation
  • the green light source 27g (G-LED) and the blue light source (B-LED) are turned on in the entire second half period (tecr to t4) in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period. Although it is in the state, it is driven by the pulse width modulation method in the second half period (tecr to t4) so that the lighting time in one frame period Tfr does not increase (see FIG. 23A).
  • FIG. 24A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification
  • FIG. 24B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification).
  • -LED It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity.
  • the configuration other than the configuration relating to driving of the backlight 25 in the present modification is the same as that of the first and second embodiments.
  • the green light source 27g (G-LED) and the blue light source 27b (B-LED) are pulsed in the white subframe period Tw. It is not driven by the width modulation method, but is continuously driven in a predetermined period in contact with the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw. That is, in the white sub-frame period Tw, the green light source 27g (G-LED) and the blue light source 27b (B-LED) start lighting at time t31 after the light emission control reference time point tecr. The lighting state continues until the end point t4 of the frame period Tw.
  • the other operations of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are the same as in the third embodiment.
  • the lighting period of the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period is the first half period (
  • the lighting period of the green light source 27g (G-LED) and the blue light source 27b (B-LED) is only the period (t31 to t4) close to the end point in the second half period. For this reason, the chromaticity point of the common color contributing to the reduction of the color break is shifted from the white in the white display to the cyan direction.
  • the lighting periods of the light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in the white subframe period Tw are arranged as described above,
  • the single-color luminance can be further improved while achieving the same effect as that of the embodiment.
  • FIG. 26A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in the present embodiment
  • FIG. 26B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in the present embodiment).
  • -LED It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity.
  • FIG. 25 (A) is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in the conventional example corresponding to the present modification
  • FIG. 25 (B) is a three primary color light source (R-LED in this conventional example).
  • G-LED, B-LED is a diagram showing the lighting time of each.
  • This prior art example is the same as the first prior art example shown in FIG. 8, FIG. 18 and FIG.
  • the blue light source 27b (B-LED) corresponding to the subsequent subframe period lights up at the light emission control reference time point tecr.
  • the light emission state is started until the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw is started (see FIG. 9, FIG. 19, and FIG. 23).
  • the blue light source (B-LED) is not turned on in the white subframe period Tw, and only in the blue subframe period Tb which is the subsequent subframe period. It is lit.
  • the other operations of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 in the present embodiment are substantially the same as those in the second embodiment, and one operation is performed in one frame period Tfr.
  • the point of the lighting time of each light source (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) is the same as that of the conventional example without any increase, which is also the same as the twelfth embodiment (see FIGS. 25 and 26).
  • FIG. 26B also in this embodiment, as in the second and third embodiments, three primary color light sources (R ⁇ ) in one frame period Tfr (TOTAL) for achieving white balance.
  • the current value at the time of lighting of each of the three primary color light sources is preset so that the ratio of the lighting time of LED, G-LED, B-LED) is 1: 2/3: 1.
  • the backlight drive circuit 23 in the present embodiment is configured such that the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 operate as described above, but other light sources in the present embodiment
  • the configuration is the same as that of the first to third embodiments. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present embodiment, the same reference numerals as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first to third embodiments denote the same or corresponding parts. It abbreviates (refer to Drawing 1, Drawing 3, and Drawing 5).
  • the blue light source 27b (B-LED) corresponding to the blue subframe period Tb as a subsequent subframe period is a white subframe period Tw as a common color subframe period. In this case, it does not turn on, but turns on only in the blue subframe period Tb.
  • the blue light source 27b is in the lighting state in the entire blue sub-frame period Tb (t4 to t5). Therefore, the emission color of the backlight 25 is shifted from white in white display to orange in the white subframe period Tw.
  • the present embodiment since the lighting periods of the respective light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are arranged as described above in each frame period Tfr, the white luminance is changed. It is possible to improve single-color luminance without For this reason, in the case where amplification processing is performed on the input image data D1 using the adjustment coefficient Ks, the present embodiment is particularly effective when the white luminance becomes larger than the single luminance.
  • the display operation liquid crystal response and LED operation
  • the green light source 27g (G-LED) is lit in the entire second half period (tecr to t4) in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period, but one frame Driving is performed by the pulse width modulation method in the second half period (tecr to t4) so that the lighting time in the period Tfr does not increase (see FIG. 26A).
  • FIG. 27A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification
  • FIG. 27B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification).
  • -LED It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity.
  • the configuration other than the configuration relating to the driving of the backlight 25 in this modification is the same as that of the first to fourth embodiments.
  • the green light source 27g (G-LED) is driven by the pulse width modulation method in the white subframe period Tw. Instead, the white subframe period Tw is continuously driven in a predetermined period in contact with the end point t4. That is, in the white subframe period Tw, the green light source 27g starts lighting at time t31 after the light emission control reference time point tecr, and is continuously lit from time t31 to the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw. .
  • the other operations of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are the same as in the fourth embodiment.
  • the lighting period of the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period is the second half period (
  • the lighting period of the green light source 27g (G-LED) is only the period (t31 to t4) close to the end point in the second half period. Therefore, in the white subframe period Tw, the light emission color of the backlight 25 is shifted from white in the white display to the orange direction.
  • the fourth embodiment since the lighting periods of the light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in each frame period Tfr are arranged as described above, the fourth embodiment is preferable. It is possible to further improve single-color luminance while achieving the same effect as that of the embodiment.
  • the red light source 27r in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period, the red light source 27r (R-LED) is in the first half period (t3 to tecr) and in the second half period (tecr to t4) in the non-lighting state.
  • the green light source 27g is also lit only in the second half period (tecr to t4), but the second half period (G-LED) does not increase the lighting time in one frame period Tfr. It is driven by pulse width modulation at tecr to t4) (see FIG. 26A).
  • FIG. 28A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification
  • FIG. 28B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification).
  • -LED It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity.
  • the configuration other than the configuration relating to the driving of the backlight 25 in this modification is the same as that of the first to fourth embodiments.
  • the lighting time of the green light source (G-LED) in one frame period Tfr does not increase as in the second to fourth embodiments (FIG. 18, FIG. 25 and so forth).
  • the green light source 27g (G-LED) is driven by the pulse width modulation method in the white subframe period Tw.
  • the white subframe period Tw is continuously driven in a predetermined period in contact with the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw.
  • the present modification is the same as the first modification of the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 27).
  • FIG. 27 the first modification of the fourth embodiment
  • the lighting period of the red light source 27r is in the white subframe period Tw.
  • the white subframe period Tw is separated into a first period (t3 to t31) and a second period (t32 to t4) respectively in contact with the start point t3 and the end point t4.
  • the red light source 27r is astigmatic from the end point t31 of the first period to the start point t32 of the second period. From this, the chromaticity point of the common color contributing to the reduction of color break shifts from white to yellow in white display.
  • the other operations of the three primary color light sources are the same as in the fourth embodiment.
  • the lighting period of the red light source 27r in the white subframe period Tw is separated into the first period and the second period without shifting the chromaticity point of white obtained as the emission color in the white subframe period Tw. It is also possible to do (see FIG. 28B).
  • the red light source 27r in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period, the red light source 27r (R-LED) is in the first half period (t3 to tecr) and in the second half period (tecr to t4) in the non-lighting state.
  • the green light source 27g is also lit only in the second half period (tecr to t4), but the second half period (G-LED) does not increase the lighting time in one frame period Tfr. It is driven by pulse width modulation at tecr to t4) (see FIG. 26A).
  • FIG. 29A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification
  • FIG. 29B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification).
  • -LED It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity.
  • the configuration other than the configuration relating to the driving of the backlight 25 in this modification is the same as that of the first to fourth embodiments.
  • the lighting time of the green light source (G-LED) in one frame period Tfr does not increase as in the second to fourth embodiments (FIG. 18, FIG. 25 and so forth).
  • the green light source 27g (G-LED) is driven by the pulse width modulation method in the white subframe period Tw.
  • the white subframe period Tw is continuously driven in a predetermined period in contact with the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw.
  • the present modification is the same as the first modification of the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 27).
  • FIG. 27 the first modification of the fourth embodiment
  • the red light source 27r (R-LED) is in the first half in the white subframe period Tw. In the period (t3 to tecr), the light is on, and in the second half period (tecr to t4), the light is off.
  • the subframe period immediately before the white subframe period Tw (preceding subframe period) as the common color subframe period is the red subframe period Tr, and the immediately following subframe period (following subframe period) Is the blue sub-frame period Tb, and the sub-frame period except immediately before and after the common color sub-frame period is the green sub-frame period Tg (see FIG. 7 and FIG. 9).
  • the order of Tg, Tb and Tw is not limited to this. Different from the above depending on the characteristics of each light source 27r, 27g, 27b (forward voltage VF and emission spectrum of R-LED, G-LED, B-LED, etc.), type (use of phosphor etc.), current etc. In some cases it may be preferable to take order.
  • each frame period is a blue, green, red primary color subframe period and a white subframe period as a common color subframe period (a white subframe which is a blue, green, blue common color) And sub-frame periods of other primary colors and common-color sub-frame periods.
  • the “common color” is basically a color including all the color components of the primary colors corresponding to the primary color sub-frame period in each frame period, and the ratio of these color components is not limited. I assume.
  • a common color sub-frame corresponding to another color composed of two primary colors instead of the white sub-frame period as a common color sub-frame period A period (eg, a yellow subframe period consisting of red and green) may be used.
  • any color other than black such as “yellow-green”, “red” or “red half of brightness” instead of “white” or “yellow” corresponds to the common color subframe period
  • the distribution ratio WRs and the adjustment coefficient Ks have been described not only in the case of fixed values but also in the case where the distribution ratio WRs and the adjustment coefficient Ks are obtained according to a specific formula.
  • Calculation formulas for obtaining the coefficient Ks may be other than those described above.
  • a conventionally known calculation formula may be used as a calculation formula for determining the distribution ratio WRs.
  • the liquid crystal panel 24 that transmits light from the backlight 25 as a light source unit is used as a display device, and an image is displayed by controlling the transmittance of the liquid crystal panel 24.
  • the present invention is not limited to a field sequential display using a transmissive light modulator such as the liquid crystal panel 24, but can be applied to a field sequential display using a reflective light modulator.
  • the present invention can be applied to a field sequential type projection display apparatus using a reflective liquid crystal panel called LCOS (Liquid Crystal On Silicon) as a light modulator.
  • LCOS Liquid Crystal On Silicon
  • the present invention can also be applied to field sequential type image display devices other than liquid crystal display devices, for example, self-luminous type image display devices such as organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices. Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a see-through image display device or the like having a function of making the back of the display panel visible.
  • field sequential type image display devices other than liquid crystal display devices
  • self-luminous type image display devices such as organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices.
  • the present invention can also be applied to a see-through image display device or the like having a function of making the back of the display panel visible.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal Display Device Control (AREA)
  • Control Of Indicators Other Than Cathode Ray Tubes (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides a field-sequential image display apparatus that is capable of reducing saturation degradation or hue deviation caused by a mixed color even when a display device having a fast optical response is not used. In the field-sequential image display apparatus in which each frame period includes sub-frame periods of green, red, white, and blue: the allocation ratio to the white sub-frame period is set as 50% and input image data of red, green, and blue is converted into driving image data of red, green, blue, and white; and a liquid crystal panel is driven on the basis of the driving image data. A backlight is driven so that light sources (G-LED) and (R-LED) are both lit only in the latter halves of the green and red sub-frame periods (Tg, Tr), that, in the white sub-frame period (Tw), the light source (R-LED) corresponding to an immediately-preceding sub-frame period is lit in the first/latter half and (G-LED) and (B-LED) are lit only in the latter half, and that (B-LED) is lit in first/latter half of the blue sub-frame period (Tb) immediately after.

Description

フィールドシーケンシャル方式の画像表示装置および画像表示方法Field sequential type image display apparatus and image display method
 本発明は、画像表示装置に関し、より詳細には、フィールドシーケンシャル方式の画像表示装置および画像表示方法に関する。 The present invention relates to an image display apparatus, and more particularly, to a field sequential image display apparatus and an image display method.
 従来から、1フレーム期間に複数のサブフレームを表示するフィールドシーケンシャル方式の画像表示装置が知られている。例えば、典型的なフィールドシーケンシャル方式の画像表示装置は、赤、緑、および、青の光源を含むバックライトを備え、1フレーム期間に赤、緑、および、青のサブフレームを表示する。赤サブフレームを表示するときには、表示パネルは赤画像データに基づき駆動され、赤色光源が発光する。続いて、緑サブフレームと青サブフレームが同様の方法で表示される。時分割で表示された3枚のサブフレームは、観測者の網膜上で残像現象によって合成され、観測者には1枚のカラー画像として認識される。 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a field sequential image display apparatus that displays a plurality of subframes in one frame period. For example, a typical field sequential image display apparatus includes backlights including red, green and blue light sources, and displays red, green and blue subframes in one frame period. When displaying a red sub-frame, the display panel is driven based on red image data, and a red light source emits light. Subsequently, the green and blue subframes are displayed in a similar manner. The three subframes displayed in time division are synthesized by the afterimage phenomenon on the retina of the observer and are recognized as one color image by the observer.
 フィールドシーケンシャル方式の画像表示装置では、観測者の視線が表示画面内を移動したときに、観測者に各サブフレームの色が分離して見えることがある(この現象は、「色割れ」と呼ばれる)。そこで、色割れを抑制するために、赤、緑、および、青のサブフレームに加えて、白のサブフレームを表示する画像表示装置が知られている。 In the field sequential image display apparatus, when the line of sight of the observer moves in the display screen, the color of each subframe may be seen separately by the observer (this phenomenon is called "color breakup". ). Therefore, there is known an image display device that displays white subframes in addition to red, green, and blue subframes in order to suppress color breakup.
 また、各サブフレーム期間において、表示すべき画像を表す画素データの表示デバイス(例えば液晶パネル)への書き込みが完了する前に当該サブフレーム期間に対応する色の光源が点灯を開始すると、次サブフレーム期間に対応する色が表示画像において混ざることになる(以下、この現象を「画素データ書込タイミング起因の混色」という)。また、液晶表示装置のように光学応答の遅い表示デバイスが使用される場合には、各サブフレーム期間において、その応答が完了するまでに当該サブフレーム期間に対応する色の光源の点灯を開始すると、次サブフレーム期間に対応する色が表示画像において混ざることになる(以下、この現象を「光学応答起因の混色」という)。このようにして、互いに隣接するサブフレーム期間にそれぞれ対応する色が混ざると、表示画像において彩度が低下したり色相がずれたりする。 In each sub-frame period, when the light source of the color corresponding to the sub-frame period starts lighting before the writing of the pixel data representing the image to be displayed to the display device (for example, liquid crystal panel) is completed, the next sub A color corresponding to the frame period will be mixed in the display image (hereinafter, this phenomenon is referred to as “mixed color due to pixel data write timing”). When a display device with a slow optical response is used as in a liquid crystal display device, lighting of a light source of a color corresponding to the subframe period is started until the response is completed in each subframe period. The color corresponding to the next sub-frame period will be mixed in the display image (hereinafter, this phenomenon is referred to as “color mixing due to optical response”). In this way, when the corresponding colors are mixed in the subframe periods adjacent to each other, the saturation falls or the hue shifts in the display image.
 本願発明に関連して、特許文献1には、時分割カラー表示装置(フィールドシーケンシャル方式の画像表示装置)において、液晶パネルに対し、線順次書き込みにより画面上部より画像信号を書き込んでいき、画面下端まで書き込んだ後、液晶の応答時間分のブランク時間後、書き込んだ画像信号の色に応じた光源を点灯するという、駆動方法が記載されている(同文献の段落[0060]、図8参照)。 In relation to the present invention, Patent Document 1 describes that in a time division color display device (field sequential type image display device), an image signal is written from the upper part of the screen by line sequential writing to a liquid crystal panel. A driving method is described in which the light source corresponding to the color of the written image signal is turned on after blanking for the response time of the liquid crystal after writing up to the point (see paragraph [0060] of the same document, FIG. 8). .
日本国特開2002-191055号公報Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-191055
 特許文献1に記載の上記時分割カラー表示装置(以下「特許文献1の画像表示装置」という)では、各サブフィールド期間(各サブフレーム期間)において、画素データの書込およびそれに対する液晶パネルの応答が完了した後に、当該サブフィールド期間(当該サブフレーム期間)に対応する色の光源の点灯が開始されるので、表示画像における彩度の低下や色相ずれが改善される。 In the above time-division color display device (hereinafter referred to as "image display device of Patent Document 1") described in Patent Document 1, writing of pixel data and the corresponding liquid crystal panel are performed in each subfield period (each subframe period). After the response is completed, the lighting of the light source of the color corresponding to the sub-field period (the sub-frame period) is started, so that the reduction in saturation and the hue shift in the display image are improved.
 しかし、特許文献1の画像表示装置においても、表示デバイス(液晶パネル)の応答特性によっては光学応答起因の混色を避けられないことがある。また、特許文献1の画像表示装置では、サブフレーム期間のうち画素データの書込に使用できる期間が短いことから、画素データを高速に書き込むための構成が必要となる。 However, even in the image display device of Patent Document 1, color mixing due to the optical response may not be avoided depending on the response characteristic of the display device (liquid crystal panel). Further, in the image display device of Patent Document 1, since a period which can be used for writing pixel data in a sub-frame period is short, a configuration for writing pixel data at high speed is required.
 そこで、光学応答の速い表示デバイスを使用せず画素データを高速に書き込む構成を備えない場合であっても混色による彩度低下や色相ずれを抑制できるフィールドシーケンシャル方式の画像表示装置を提供することが望まれている。 Therefore, it is possible to provide a field sequential type image display device capable of suppressing saturation reduction and hue shift due to color mixing even when the display device with fast optical response is not used and the configuration without the configuration for writing pixel data at high speed is not provided. It is desired.
 本発明のいくつかの実施形態は、複数の原色にそれぞれ対応する複数の原色サブフレーム期間と共通色サブフレーム期間とからなる複数のサブフレーム期間が各フレーム期間に含まれるフィールドシーケンシャル方式の画像表示装置であって、
 前記複数の原色でそれぞれ発光する複数の光源を含む光源部と、
 前記光源部からの光を透過または反射させる光変調部と、
 各サブフレーム期間において対応する色の光が前記光変調部に照射されるように前記光源部を駆動する光源部駆動回路と、
 各サブフレーム期間で対応する色の画像が表示されるように前記光変調部における透過率または反射率を制御する光変調部駆動回路とを備え、
 前記光源部駆動回路は、前記共通色サブフレーム期間の始点から前記共通色サブフレーム期間においてその直前のサブフレーム期間である先行サブフレーム期間に対応する第1の原色の光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間、および、前記共通色サブフレーム期間の直後のサブフレーム期間である後続サブフレーム期間の始点から当該後続サブフレーム期間において対応する第2の原色の光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間のうち少なくとも一方は、前記複数の原色のうち前記第1および第2の原色以外の他の原色に対応する原色サブフレーム期間の始点から当該原色サブフレーム期間において光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間よりも短くなるように、前記光源部を駆動する。
According to some embodiments of the present invention, field sequential image display in which each frame period includes a plurality of subframe periods each including a plurality of primary color subframe periods corresponding to a plurality of primary colors and a common color subframe period. A device,
A light source unit including a plurality of light sources emitting light in the plurality of primary colors;
A light modulation unit that transmits or reflects light from the light source unit;
A light source unit driving circuit for driving the light source unit such that light of a corresponding color is emitted to the light modulation unit in each subframe period;
A light modulation unit driving circuit for controlling the transmittance or the reflectance of the light modulation unit so that an image of a corresponding color is displayed in each subframe period;
The light source unit drive circuit is configured to start lighting the light source of the first primary color corresponding to the preceding subframe period which is the immediately preceding subframe period in the common color subframe period from the start point of the common color subframe period And the time from the start of the subsequent subframe period which is a subframe period immediately after the common color subframe period to the time when the light source of the corresponding second primary color starts lighting in the subsequent subframe period Of at least one of the plurality of primary colors from a start point of a primary color sub-frame period corresponding to another primary color other than the first and second primary colors to a time point when the light source starts lighting in the primary color The light source unit is driven to be shorter than time.
 上記いくつかの実施形態の好ましい構成は、複数の原色に対応する入力画像データを受け取り、先行サブフレーム期間から共通色サブフレーム期間に切り替わる時に光変調部における透過率または反射率が実質的に変化しないかまたは低下し、かつ、共通色サブフレーム期間から後続サブフレーム期間に切り替わる時に光変調部における透過率または反射率が実質的に変化しないかまたは上昇するように、当該入力画像データから上記複数のサブフレーム期間に対応する駆動用画像データを生成する画像データ変換部を更に備え、光変調部駆動回路は、当該駆動用画像データに基づき、各サブフレーム期間で対応する色の画像が表示されるように光変調部における透過率または反射率を制御する。 Preferred configurations of the above embodiments receive substantially the input light data corresponding to a plurality of primary colors, and substantially change in transmittance or reflectance in the light modulation section when switching from the preceding subframe period to the common color subframe period. From the input image data so that the transmittance or the reflectance in the light modulation section does not substantially change or increase when switching from the common color subframe period to the subsequent subframe period. The light modulation unit driving circuit further displays an image of a corresponding color in each subframe period based on the driving image data. Control the transmittance or reflectance of the light modulation unit.
 本発明の他のいくつかの実施形態は、複数の原色でそれぞれ発光する複数の光源を含む光源部と、前記光源部からの光を透過または反射させる光変調部とを備える画像表示装置において、前記複数の原色にそれぞれ対応する複数の原色サブフレーム期間と共通色サブフレーム期間とからなる複数のサブフレーム期間が各フレーム期間に含まれるフィールドシーケンシャル方式によりカラー画像を表示する画像表示方法であって、
 各サブフレーム期間において対応する色の光が前記光変調部に照射されるように前記光源部を駆動する光源部駆動ステップと、
 各サブフレーム期間で対応する色の画像が表示されるように前記光変調部における透過率または反射率を制御する光変調部駆動ステップとを備え、
 前記光源部駆動ステップでは、前記共通色サブフレーム期間の始点から前記共通色サブフレーム期間においてその直前のサブフレーム期間である先行サブフレーム期間に対応する第1の原色の光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間、および、前記共通色サブフレーム期間の直後のサブフレーム期間である後続サブフレーム期間の始点から当該後続サブフレーム期間において対応する第2の原色の光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間のうち少なくとも一方は、前記複数の原色のうち前記第1および第2の原色以外の他の原色に対応する原色サブフレーム期間の始点から当該原色サブフレーム期間において光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間よりも短くなるように、前記光源部が駆動される。
Another embodiment of the present invention is an image display device including a light source unit including a plurality of light sources emitting light of a plurality of primary colors, and a light modulation unit transmitting or reflecting light from the light source unit. An image display method for displaying a color image according to a field sequential method in which each frame period includes a plurality of sub-frame periods consisting of a plurality of primary color sub-frame periods and a common color sub-frame period respectively corresponding to the plurality of primary colors. ,
A light source unit driving step of driving the light source unit such that light of a corresponding color is irradiated to the light modulation unit in each subframe period;
And d) a light modulation unit driving step of controlling the transmittance or reflectance of the light modulation unit so that an image of a corresponding color is displayed in each subframe period.
In the light source unit driving step, when the light source of the first primary color corresponding to the preceding subframe period which is the immediately preceding subframe period in the common color subframe period from the start point of the common color subframe period starts lighting And the time from the start of the subsequent subframe period which is a subframe period immediately after the common color subframe period to the time when the light source of the corresponding second primary color starts lighting in the subsequent subframe period Of at least one of the plurality of primary colors from a start point of a primary color sub-frame period corresponding to another primary color other than the first and second primary colors to a time point when the light source starts lighting in the primary color The light source unit is driven to be shorter than time.
 本発明の上記いくつかの実施形態によれば、共通色サブフレーム期間の始点から先行サブフレーム期間(共通色サブフレーム期間の直前の原色サブフレーム期間)に対応する第1の原色の光源の点灯開始時点までの時間、および、後続サブフレーム期間(共通色サブフレーム期間の直後の原色サブフレーム期間)の始点から当該後続サブフレーム期間に対応する第2の原色の光源の点灯開始時点までの時間のうち少なくとも一方は、画像表示のための複数の原色のうち第1および第2の原色以外の他の原色に対応する原色サブフレーム期間の始点から当該原色サブフレーム期間における光源の点灯開始時点までの時間よりも短い。これにより、フィールドシーケンシャル方式の画像表示装置において、光変調部の光学応答の遅れによる彩度低下や色相ずれを抑えつつ発光に関する時間的空隙を低減して表示輝度を向上させることができる。 According to the above embodiments of the present invention, lighting of the light source of the first primary color corresponding to the preceding subframe period (the primary color subframe period immediately before the common color subframe period) from the start of the common color subframe period The time from the start time to the start time of the light source of the second primary color corresponding to the subsequent subframe period from the start of the subsequent subframe period (the primary color subframe period immediately after the common color subframe period) And at least one of a plurality of primary colors for image display from a start point of a primary color subframe period corresponding to another primary color other than the first and second primary colors to a lighting start time point of the light source in the primary color subframe period Less than time. As a result, in the field sequential type image display device, it is possible to improve the display luminance by reducing the time gap for light emission while suppressing the saturation decrease and the hue shift due to the delay of the optical response of the light modulation unit.
 本発明の上記いくつかの実施形態の好ましい構成によれば、先行サブフレーム期間から共通色サブフレーム期間に切り替わる時には光変調部の応答はディケイ応答となるので、共通色サブフレーム期間内の早い時点で第1の原色の光源(先行サブフレーム期間に対応する原色の光源)が点灯しても彩度低下や色相ずれ等の問題は生じない。また、共通色サブフレーム期間から後続サブフレーム期間に切り替わる時には光変調部の光学応答はライズ応答となるので、後続サブフレーム期間内の早い時点で第2の原色の光源(後続サブフレーム期間に対応する原色の光源)が点灯しても混色は発生しない。したがって、彩度低下や色相ずれ等の問題を生じさせることなく、各色の輝度を向上させることができる。 According to a preferable configuration of the above-described some embodiments of the present invention, when switching from the preceding subframe period to the common color subframe period, the response of the light modulation unit becomes a decay response. Even if the light source of the first primary color (the light source of the primary color corresponding to the preceding subframe period) is turned on, problems such as saturation reduction and hue shift do not occur. Also, when switching from the common color sub-frame period to the subsequent sub-frame period, the optical response of the light modulation unit becomes a rise response, so the light source of the second primary color in the subsequent sub-frame period Even if the light source of the primary color is turned on, color mixing does not occur. Therefore, the luminance of each color can be improved without causing problems such as saturation reduction and hue shift.
第1の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram showing composition of an image display device concerning a 1st embodiment. 上記第1の実施形態に係る画像表示装置におけるパラメータを説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the parameter in the image display apparatus which concerns on the said 1st Embodiment. 上記第1の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の画像データ変換処理のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of the image data conversion process of the image display apparatus which concerns on the said 1st Embodiment. 上記第1の実施形態に係る画像表示装置における彩度と白サブフレームへの分配割合の範囲を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the range of the distribution ratio to the saturation and the white sub-frame in the image display apparatus which concerns on the said 1st Embodiment. 上記第1の実施形態におけるバックライト駆動回路の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the backlight drive circuit in the said 1st Embodiment. 従来の画像表示装置におけるバックライトの動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートである。It is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the back light in the conventional image display device. 上記第1の実施形態におけるバックライトの動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートである。It is a timing chart for demonstrating the operation | movement of the backlight in the said 1st Embodiment. 上記第1の実施形態に係る画像表示装置と比較するための第1従来例としての画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間を示す図(B)である。A timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for explaining the operation of the image display apparatus as a first conventional example for comparison with the image display apparatus according to the first embodiment, and a diagram showing the lighting time of each light source B). 上記第1の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間および発光量を示す図(B)である。They are a timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for demonstrating operation | movement of the image display apparatus which concerns on the said 1st Embodiment, and a figure (B) which shows the lighting time and light-emission quantity of each light source. 上記第1の実施形態に係る画像表示装置において表示すべき色(目標色)を変えた場合の表示動作を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the display operation at the time of changing the color (target color) which should be displayed in the image display apparatus which concerns on the said 1st Embodiment. 上記第1の実施形態における第1分配割合WRs1のグラフを示す図である。It is a figure which shows the graph of 1st distribution ratio WRs1 in the said 1st Embodiment. 上記第1の実施形態に係る画像表示装置における第2分配割合WRsv2を求める関数の決定方法を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the determination method of the function which calculates | requires 2nd distribution ratio WRsv2 in the image display apparatus which concerns on the said 1st Embodiment. 上記第1の実施形態における混色色相のずれの補償方法を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the compensation method of the shift | offset | difference of the color mixing hue in the said 1st Embodiment. 上記第1の実施形態の第1変形例に係る画像表示装置と比較するための第2従来例としての画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間を示す図(B)である。Timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for explaining the operation of the image display apparatus as the second prior art for comparison with the image display apparatus according to the first modification of the first embodiment and lighting of each light source It is a figure (B) which shows time. 上記第1の実施形態の第1変形例に係る画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間および発光量を示す図(B)である。They are a timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for demonstrating operation | movement of the image display apparatus which concerns on the 1st modification of the said 1st Embodiment, and a figure (B) which shows lighting time and light-emission quantity of each light source. 上記第1の実施形態の第2変形例に係る画像表示装置と比較するための第3従来例としての画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間を示す図(B)である。Timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for explaining the operation of the image display apparatus as the third prior art for comparison with the image display apparatus according to the second modification of the first embodiment and lighting of each light source It is a figure (B) which shows time. 上記第1の実施形態の第2変形例に係る画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間および発光量を示す図(B)である。They are a timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for demonstrating operation | movement of the image display apparatus which concerns on the 2nd modification of said 1st Embodiment, and a figure (B) which shows lighting time and light emission amount of each light source. 第2の実施形態に係る画像表示装置と比較するための第1従来例としての画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間を示す図(B)である。A timing chart and a waveform diagram (A) for explaining the operation of the image display apparatus as a first conventional example for comparison with the image display apparatus according to the second embodiment and a diagram showing the lighting time of each light source (B ). 上記第2の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間および発光量を示す図(B)である。They are a timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for demonstrating operation | movement of the image display apparatus which concerns on the said 2nd Embodiment, and a figure (B) which shows the lighting time and light-emission quantity of each light source. 上記第2の実施形態の第1変形例に係る画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間および発光量を示す図(B)である。They are a timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for demonstrating operation | movement of the image display apparatus which concerns on the 1st modification of the said 2nd Embodiment, and a figure (B) which shows lighting time and light-emission quantity of each light source. 上記第2の実施形態の第2変形例に係る画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間および発光量を示す図(B)である。They are a timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for demonstrating the operation | movement of the image display apparatus which concerns on the 2nd modification of the said 2nd Embodiment, and a figure (B) which shows lighting time and luminescence amount of each light source. 第3の実施形態に係る画像表示装置と比較するための第1従来例としての画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間を示す図(B)である。A timing chart and a waveform diagram (A) for explaining the operation of the image display apparatus as the first conventional example for comparison with the image display apparatus according to the third embodiment and a diagram showing the lighting time of each light source (B ). 上記第3の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間および発光量を示す図(B)である。They are a timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for demonstrating operation | movement of the image display apparatus which concerns on the said 3rd Embodiment, and a figure (B) which shows the lighting time and light-emission quantity of each light source. 上記第3の実施形態の第1変形例に係る画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間および発光量を示す図(B)である。They are a timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for demonstrating the operation | movement of the image display apparatus which concerns on the 1st modification of the said 3rd Embodiment, and a figure (B) which shows lighting time and luminescence amount of each light source. 第4の実施形態に係る画像表示装置と比較するための第1従来例としての画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間を示す図(B)である。A timing chart and a waveform diagram (A) for explaining the operation of the image display apparatus as a first conventional example for comparison with the image display apparatus according to the fourth embodiment and a diagram showing the lighting time of each light source (B ). 上記第4の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間および発光量を示す図(B)である。They are a timing chart and waveform chart (A) for demonstrating operation | movement of the image display apparatus which concerns on the said 4th Embodiment, and a figure (B) which shows the lighting time and light-emission quantity of each light source. 上記第4の実施形態の第1変形例に係る画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間および発光量を示す図(B)である。They are a timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for demonstrating operation | movement of the image display apparatus which concerns on the 1st modification of the said 4th Embodiment, and a figure (B) which shows lighting time and light-emission quantity of each light source. 上記第4の実施形態の第2変形例に係る画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各原色の光源点灯時間および発光量を示す図(B)である。They are a timing chart and waveform chart (A) for demonstrating operation | movement of the image display apparatus which concerns on the 2nd modification of the said 4th Embodiment, and a figure (B) which shows the light source lighting time and light emission amount of each primary color. 上記第4の実施形態の第3変形例に係る画像表示装置の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図(A)ならびに各光源の点灯時間および発光量を示す図(B)である。They are a timing chart and waveform diagram (A) for demonstrating operation | movement of the image display apparatus which concerns on the 3rd modification of the said 4th Embodiment, and a figure (B) which shows lighting time and light-emission quantity of each light source.
 以下、図面を参照して各実施形態に係る画像表示装置および画像表示方法について説明する。なお、以下の説明に含まれる「演算」には、「演算器を用いて演算結果を求める」ことに加えて、「演算結果を予めテーブルに記憶しておき、テーブルを引くことにより演算結果を求める」ことが含まれることを予め指摘しておく。 Hereinafter, an image display device and an image display method according to each embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition to "calculate the calculation result using an arithmetic unit" in "calculation" included in the following description, "calculate the calculation result in advance by storing the calculation result in a table, and draw the table." It is pointed out in advance that "to ask" is included.
<1.第1の実施形態>
<1.1 全体構成>
 図1は、第1の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成を示すブロック図である。図1に示す画像表示装置1は、画像データ変換部10と表示部20を備えている。画像データ変換部10は、パラメータ記憶部11、統計値/彩度演算部12、分配割合/係数演算部13、および、駆動用画像データ演算部33を含んでいる。表示部20は、光変調部としての液晶パネル24、光源部としてのバックライト25、タイミング制御回路21、光変調部駆動回路としてのパネル駆動回路22、および、光源部駆動回路としてのバックライト駆動回路23を含んでいる。
<1. First embodiment>
<1.1 Overall Configuration>
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the image display apparatus according to the first embodiment. The image display device 1 shown in FIG. 1 includes an image data conversion unit 10 and a display unit 20. The image data conversion unit 10 includes a parameter storage unit 11, a statistical value / saturation operation unit 12, a distribution ratio / coefficient operation unit 13, and a drive image data operation unit 33. The display unit 20 includes a liquid crystal panel 24 as a light modulation unit, a backlight 25 as a light source unit, a timing control circuit 21, a panel drive circuit 22 as a light modulation unit drive circuit, and a backlight drive as a light source unit drive circuit. A circuit 23 is included.
 画像表示装置1は、フィールドシーケンシャル方式の液晶表示装置である。画像表示装置1は、1フレーム期間を複数のサブフレーム期間に分割し、各サブフレーム期間において異なる色のサブフレームを表示する。以下、画像表示装置1は、1フレーム期間を4個のサブフレーム期間に分割し、第1~第4サブフレーム期間では緑、赤、白、および青のサブフレームをそれぞれ表示するものとする(後述の図7参照)。画像表示装置1では、白サブフレームが共通色サブフレームとなる。なお、各サブフレームにおける「色」とは光源色を指しており、画像表示装置1の表示部20は、バックライト25を駆動するための光源駆動用データとして赤、緑、青につきいずれも“1”(最大値)が与えられた場合に所望の色温度である「白色」を表示できるように構成されているものとする(後述の他の実施形態においても同様)。 The image display device 1 is a field sequential liquid crystal display device. The image display device 1 divides one frame period into a plurality of subframe periods, and displays subframes of different colors in each subframe period. Hereinafter, the image display device 1 divides one frame period into four subframe periods, and displays green, red, white, and blue subframes respectively in the first to fourth subframe periods (see FIG. See FIG. 7 below). In the image display device 1, the white subframes become the common color subframes. The “color” in each sub-frame refers to the light source color, and the display unit 20 of the image display device 1 uses “red”, “green”, and “blue” as light source drive data for driving the backlight 25. It is assumed that "white" which is a desired color temperature can be displayed when 1 "(maximum value) is given (the same applies to other embodiments described later).
 画像表示装置1には、赤、緑、および、青の画像データを含む入力画像データD1が入力される。画像データ変換部10は、入力画像データD1に基づき、緑、赤、白、および青のサブフレームに対応した駆動用画像データD2を求める。以下、この処理を「画像データ変換処理」といい、緑、赤、白、および青のサブフレームに対応した駆動用画像データD2を、それぞれ、「駆動用画像データD2に含まれる緑、赤、白、および青の画像データ」という。表示部20は、駆動用画像データD2に基づき、1フレーム期間に緑、赤、白、および青のサブフレームを表示する。 Input image data D1 including image data of red, green, and blue is input to the image display device 1. The image data conversion unit 10 obtains driving image data D2 corresponding to the green, red, white, and blue sub-frames based on the input image data D1. Hereinafter, this process is referred to as “image data conversion process”, and the drive image data D2 corresponding to the green, red, white, and blue sub-frames are “green, red, and so on included in the drive image data D2, respectively. It is called "white and blue image data". The display unit 20 displays green, red, white, and blue sub-frames in one frame period based on the driving image data D2.
 タイミング制御回路21は、パネル駆動回路22とバックライト駆動回路23に対してタイミング制御信号TCを出力する。パネル駆動回路22は、タイミング制御信号TCと駆動用画像データD2に基づき液晶パネル24を駆動する。バックライト駆動回路23は、タイミング制御信号TCおよびパラメータ記憶部11からの後述のパラメータWBRに基づきバックライト25を駆動する。液晶パネル24は、2次元状に配置された複数の画素26を含んでいる。バックライト25は、赤色光源27r、緑色光源27g、および、青色光源27bを含んでいる(以下では、これらの光源27r,27g,27bを「3原色光源」ともいい、また総称的に「光源27」ともいう)。バックライト25は、白色光源を含んでいてもよい。光源27には、例えばLED(Light Emitting Diode:発光ダイオード)が使用される。 The timing control circuit 21 outputs a timing control signal TC to the panel drive circuit 22 and the backlight drive circuit 23. The panel drive circuit 22 drives the liquid crystal panel 24 based on the timing control signal TC and the drive image data D2. The backlight drive circuit 23 drives the backlight 25 based on the timing control signal TC and a parameter WBR, which will be described later, from the parameter storage unit 11. The liquid crystal panel 24 includes a plurality of pixels 26 arranged in a two-dimensional manner. The backlight 25 includes a red light source 27r, a green light source 27g, and a blue light source 27b (in the following, these light sources 27r, 27g, and 27b are also referred to as "three primary color light sources". It is also called "). The backlight 25 may include a white light source. For the light source 27, for example, an LED (Light Emitting Diode) is used.
 第1サブフレーム期間(以下「緑サブフレーム期間Tg」ともいう)では、パネル駆動回路22は駆動用画像データD2に含まれる緑画像データに基づき液晶パネル24を駆動し、バックライト駆動回路23は緑色光源27gを発光させる。これにより、緑サブフレームが表示される。 In the first sub-frame period (hereinafter also referred to as “green sub-frame period Tg”), panel drive circuit 22 drives liquid crystal panel 24 based on green image data included in drive image data D2, and backlight drive circuit 23 The green light source 27g is made to emit light. Thus, the green sub-frame is displayed.
 第2サブフレーム期間(以下「赤サブフレーム期間Tr」ともいう)では、パネル駆動回路22は駆動用画像データD2に含まれる赤画像データに基づき液晶パネル24を駆動し、バックライト駆動回路23は赤色光源27rを発光させる。これにより、赤サブフレームが表示される。 In the second sub-frame period (hereinafter also referred to as “red sub-frame period Tr”), panel drive circuit 22 drives liquid crystal panel 24 based on red image data included in drive image data D2, and backlight drive circuit 23 The red light source 27r is made to emit light. Thereby, a red sub-frame is displayed.
 第3サブフレーム期間(以下「白サブフレーム期間Tw」ともいう)では、パネル駆動回路22は駆動用画像データD2に含まれる白画像データに基づき液晶パネル24を駆動し、バックライト駆動回路23は赤色光源27r、緑色光源27g、および、青色光源27bを発光させる。これにより、白サブフレームが表示される。なお、バックライト25が白色光源を含む場合には、バックライト駆動回路23は第3サブフレーム期間において白色光源を発光させてもよい。 In the third sub-frame period (hereinafter also referred to as "white sub-frame period Tw"), panel drive circuit 22 drives liquid crystal panel 24 based on the white image data included in drive image data D2, and backlight drive circuit 23 The red light source 27r, the green light source 27g, and the blue light source 27b are made to emit light. Thereby, a white sub-frame is displayed. When the backlight 25 includes a white light source, the backlight drive circuit 23 may cause the white light source to emit light in the third subframe period.
 第4サブフレーム期間(以下「青サブフレーム期間Tb」ともいう)では、パネル駆動回路22は駆動用画像データD2に含まれる青画像データに基づき液晶パネル24を駆動し、バックライト駆動回路23は青色光源27bを発光させる。これにより、青サブフレームが表示される。 In the fourth sub-frame period (hereinafter also referred to as “blue sub-frame period Tb”), panel drive circuit 22 drives liquid crystal panel 24 based on blue image data included in drive image data D2, and backlight drive circuit 23 The blue light source 27b is made to emit light. This causes blue sub-frames to be displayed.
<1.2 画像データ変換部の詳細>
 以下、画像データ変換部10の詳細を説明する。入力画像データD1に含まれる原色成分としての赤、緑、および、青の画像データは、0以上1以下の値に正規化された輝度データである。3色の画像データが等しいときに、画素26は無彩色になる。駆動用画像データD2に含まれる白、赤、緑、および、青の画像データも、0以上1以下の値に正規化された輝度データである。なお、画像データ変換部10は、例えばCPU(中央演算処理装置)とメモリを含むマイクロコンピュータ(以下「マイコン」と略記する)を使用し、マイコンが後述の図3に相当する所定プログラムを実行することによりソフトウェア的に実現することができる。これに代えて、画像データ変換部10の一部または全部を専用ハードウェア(典型的には、専用に設計された特定用途向け集積回路)として実現することも可能である。
<1.2 Details of Image Data Converter>
Hereinafter, the details of the image data conversion unit 10 will be described. The image data of red, green, and blue as primary color components included in the input image data D1 is luminance data normalized to a value of 0 or more and 1 or less. When the three color image data are equal, the pixel 26 is achromatic. The white, red, green, and blue image data included in the driving image data D2 are also luminance data normalized to a value of 0 or more and 1 or less. The image data conversion unit 10 uses, for example, a microcomputer (hereinafter abbreviated as a "microcomputer") including a CPU (central processing unit) and a memory, and the microcomputer executes a predetermined program corresponding to FIG. 3 described later. It can be realized by software. Instead of this, it is also possible to realize part or all of the image data conversion unit 10 as dedicated hardware (typically, an application specific integrated circuit designed specifically for exclusive use).
 画像データ変換処理では、入力画像データD1の表す画像(入力画像)の各画素の青、緑、および、赤の値(以下「入力画像のBGR画素データ値」という)に乗算すべき係数である調整係数Ksを用いた増幅圧縮処理を行うと共に、その増幅圧縮処理の施された入力画像のBGR画素データ値を白、赤、緑、および、青のサブフレームの画素データ値(以下「駆動用のWBGR画素データ値」という)に変換する色成分変換処理を行う(後述の式(5a)~(5d)参照)。この画像データ変換処理では、駆動用画像データD2に含まれる白画像データ(共通色サブフレームに分配される値)は、0以上1以下の範囲で決定される。また、この画像データ変換処理では、入力画像の各画素につき、当該画素の表示のために1フレーム期間で発すべき白色成分の表示光量のうち白サブフレーム期間Twで発すべき表示光量の割合(「白サブフレームの分配割合WRs」もしくは「共通色分配割合WRs」、または、単に「分配割合WRs」という)がまず決定され、その分配割合WRsに基づき白画像データ等の駆動用のWGBR画素データ値が求められる。例えば、入力画像データD1に含まれる赤画像データが0.5、緑および青の画像データが1のときに、調整係数Ksを1として、分配割合WRsを0.6に決定した場合、駆動用画像データD2に含まれる白画像データは0.3になる。 In the image data conversion process, the blue, green, and red values of each pixel of the image (input image) represented by the input image data D1 (hereinafter referred to as "the BGR pixel data value of the input image") are coefficients to be multiplied. While performing amplification compression processing using the adjustment coefficient Ks, the BGR pixel data values of the input image subjected to the amplification compression processing are pixel data values of white, red, green, and blue subframes (hereinafter referred to as “driving Color component conversion processing (hereinafter referred to as equations (5a) to (5d)). In this image data conversion process, white image data (values distributed to the common color sub-frames) included in the drive image data D2 is determined in the range of 0 or more and 1 or less. Further, in this image data conversion processing, for each pixel of the input image, a ratio of the display light amount to be emitted in the white subframe period Tw to the display light amount of the white component to be emitted in one frame period to display the pixel (“ The distribution ratio WRs of white subframes or “common color distribution ratio WRs” or simply “distribution ratio WRs” is determined first, and WGBR pixel data values for driving white image data etc. based on the distribution ratio WRs. Is required. For example, when the red image data contained in the input image data D1 is 0.5, and the green and blue image data is 1, the adjustment factor Ks is set to 1 and the distribution ratio WRs is set to 0.6. The white image data contained in the image data D2 is 0.3.
 パラメータ記憶部11は、画像データ変換処理で用いるパラメータWRX、RA、RB、WBRを記憶する。統計値/彩度演算部12は、入力画像データD1に基づき各画素について、最大値Dmaxと最小値Dminと彩度Sを求める。分配割合/係数演算部13は、最大値Dmaxと彩度SとパラメータWRX、RA、RB、WBRに基づき、分配割合WRsと調整係数(以下、単に「係数」ともいう)Ksとを求める(詳細は後述)。駆動用画像データ演算部33は、入力画像データD1、最小値Dmin、分配割合WRs、係数Ks、および、パラメータWBRに基づき、駆動用画像データD2を求める。 The parameter storage unit 11 stores parameters WRX, RA, RB, and WBR used in image data conversion processing. The statistical value / saturation calculation unit 12 obtains the maximum value Dmax, the minimum value Dmin, and the saturation S for each pixel based on the input image data D1. The distribution ratio / coefficient calculation unit 13 obtains the distribution ratio WRs and the adjustment coefficient (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “coefficient”) Ks based on the maximum value Dmax and the saturation S and the parameters WRX, RA, RB, WBR (Details Is mentioned later). The drive image data calculation unit 33 obtains the drive image data D2 based on the input image data D1, the minimum value Dmin, the distribution ratio WRs, the coefficient Ks, and the parameter WBR.
 以下、パラメータ記憶部11に記憶されるパラメータについて説明する。パラメータWRXは、表示部20に含まれる画素26の応答特性に応じたパラメータである。パラメータWRXは、分配割合WRsを求める計算式に含まれる。パラメータWBRは、白サブフレームを表示するときの、バックライト25に含まれる光源27の輝度を指定し、0≦WBR≦1の範囲内の値を取る。本実施形態では、パラメータWBRに従い、白サブフレームを表示するときの光源27の輝度が、他のサブフレームを表示するときの光源27の輝度のWBR倍に制御される。したがってパラメータWBRは、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおける各光源27xの輝度の当該光源27xに対応するサブフレーム期間Txにおける当該光源27xの輝度に対する比を示している(x=r,g,b)。 The parameters stored in the parameter storage unit 11 will be described below. The parameter WRX is a parameter according to the response characteristic of the pixel 26 included in the display unit 20. The parameter WRX is included in the formula for determining the distribution ratio WRs. The parameter WBR specifies the luminance of the light source 27 included in the backlight 25 when displaying a white subframe, and takes a value within the range of 0 ≦ WBR ≦ 1. In the present embodiment, according to the parameter WBR, the luminance of the light source 27 when displaying a white subframe is controlled to WBR times the luminance of the light source 27 when displaying another subframe. Therefore, the parameter WBR indicates the ratio of the luminance of each light source 27x in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period to the luminance of the light source 27x in the subframe period Tx corresponding to the light source 27x (x = r , G, b).
 駆動用画像データD2の1フレーム期間内の最小値をDDmin、最大値をDDmaxとする。分配割合/係数演算部13は、パラメータ記憶部11に記憶されたパラメータRA、RBに応じて、次式(1)を満たすように係数Ksを求める。
  DDmax≦RA・DDmin+RB …(1)
例えば、RB=1-RAの場合、式(1)を満たす範囲は、図2に示す斜線部になる。このようにパラメータRA、RBは、最小値DDminに応じて最大値DDmaxの範囲を指定する。なお、この式(1)に示すように、駆動用画像データの1フレーム期間内の最小値に応じて駆動用画像データの1フレーム期間内の最大値の範囲を決定することにより、1フレーム期間内の変換後の画像データの変化を抑制し、色再現性を高くすることができる。
The minimum value in one frame period of the driving image data D2 is DDmin, and the maximum value is DDmax. The distribution ratio / coefficient operation unit 13 obtains the coefficient Ks so as to satisfy the following equation (1) according to the parameters RA and RB stored in the parameter storage unit 11.
DDmax ≦ RA · DDmin + RB (1)
For example, in the case of RB = 1-RA, the range satisfying the equation (1) is the hatched portion shown in FIG. Thus, the parameters RA and RB designate the range of the maximum value DDmax according to the minimum value DDmin. As shown in the equation (1), one frame period is determined by determining the range of the maximum value in one frame period of the drive image data in accordance with the minimum value in one frame period of the drive image data. It is possible to suppress the change of the image data after conversion and improve the color reproducibility.
 図3は、画像データ変換処理のフローチャートである。図3に示す処理は、入力画像データD1に含まれる各画素のデータについて行われる。以下、入力画像データD1に含まれる或る画素の赤、緑、および、青の画像データ(入力画像のBGR画素データ値)をそれぞれRi、Gi、Bi、駆動用画像データD2に含まれる当該画素の白、青、緑、および、赤の画像データ(駆動用のWBGR画素データ値)をそれぞれWd、Bd、Gd、Rdとし、3色の画像データRi、Gi、Biに対する処理を説明する。 FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the image data conversion process. The process shown in FIG. 3 is performed on the data of each pixel included in the input image data D1. Hereinafter, the red, green and blue image data (BGR pixel data value of the input image) of a certain pixel included in the input image data D1 are respectively included in Ri, Gi, Bi, and the drive image data D2 Let Wd, Bd, Gd, and Rd be the white, blue, green, and red image data (WBGR pixel data values for driving), respectively, and the process for the three-color image data Ri, Gi, and Bi will be described.
 図3に示すように、画像データ変換部10には、3色の画像データRi、Gi、Biが入力される(ステップS101)。次に、統計値/彩度演算部12は、3色の画像データRi、Gi、Biについて最大値Dmaxと最小値Dminを求める(ステップS102)。次に、統計値/彩度演算部12は、最大値Dmaxと最小値Dminに基づき、次式(2)に従い彩度Sを求める(ステップS103)。
  S=(Dmax-Dmin)/Dmax …(2)
ただし、式(2)において、Dmax=0のときにはS=0とする。
As shown in FIG. 3, image data Ri, Gi, Bi of three colors are input to the image data conversion unit 10 (step S101). Next, the statistical value / saturation calculation unit 12 obtains the maximum value Dmax and the minimum value Dmin for the image data Ri, Gi, Bi of three colors (step S102). Next, the statistical value / saturation calculating unit 12 obtains the saturation S according to the following equation (2) based on the maximum value Dmax and the minimum value Dmin (step S103).
S = (Dmax-Dmin) / Dmax (2)
However, in the equation (2), when Dmax = 0, S = 0.
 次に、分配割合/係数演算部13は、パラメータWRXに基づき白サブフレームの分配割合WRsを求める(ステップS104)。本実施形態では、白サブフレーム期間Twにおける光源27の輝度を決定するパラメータWBRは1であるとして、分配割合WRs=WRXでありWRX=0.5とする構成を中心に説明するが、分配割合WRsは、これに限定されるものではなく0.5近傍の値であればよい。より一般的には、分配割合WRsをWBR/(1+WBR)またはその近傍の値とすればよい(詳細は後述)。 Next, the distribution ratio / coefficient calculation unit 13 obtains the distribution ratio WRs of the white subframe based on the parameter WRX (step S104). In this embodiment, the parameter WBR for determining the luminance of the light source 27 in the white subframe period Tw is assumed to be 1, and the distribution ratio WRs = WRX and WRX = 0.5 will be mainly described. The WRs is not limited to this, and may be a value near 0.5. More generally, the distribution ratio WRs may be WBR / (1 + WBR) or a value in the vicinity thereof (the details will be described later).
 次に、分配割合/係数演算部13は、彩度SとパラメータWRX、RA、RB、WBRに基づき、後述する計算式に従い係数Ksを求める(ステップS105)。分配割合/係数演算部13は、ステップS104で分配割合WRsを求めた後にステップS105で係数Ksを求めるときには、分配割合WRsを用い、かつ、入力画像データD1の最大値Dmaxを入力画像データD1が取り得る最大値1とする条件下で係数Ksが取り得る最大値(または、最大値以下の値)を求める。なお、この調整係数Ksは必ずしも導入する必要はなく、調整係数Ksを導入しない場合、本実施形態は以下においてKs=1とした構成となる。 Next, the distribution ratio / coefficient calculating unit 13 obtains the coefficient Ks according to a calculation formula described later based on the saturation S and the parameters WRX, RA, RB, and WBR (step S105). When calculating the coefficient Ks in step S105 after calculating the distribution ratio WRs in step S104, the distribution ratio / coefficient calculation unit 13 uses the distribution ratio WRs and uses the maximum value Dmax of the input image data D1 as the input image data D1. Under the condition that the possible maximum value is 1, the maximum value (or the value below the maximum value) that the coefficient Ks can take is determined. The adjustment coefficient Ks does not have to be necessarily introduced. In the case where the adjustment coefficient Ks is not introduced, the present embodiment is configured to set Ks = 1 in the following.
 次に、駆動用画像データ演算部33は、3色の画像データRi、Gi、Bi、最小値Dmin、分配割合WRs、係数Ks、および、パラメータWBRに基づき、次式(5a)~(5d)に従い、4色の画像データWd、Bd、Gd、Rdを求める(ステップS106)。
  Wd=WRs・Dmin・Ks・PP/WBR …(5a)
  Bd=(Bi-WRs・Dmin)Ks・PP …(5b)
  Gd=(Gi-WRs・Dmin)Ks・PP …(5c)
  Rd=(Ri-WRs・Dmin)Ks・PP …(5d)
ただし、式(5a)~(5d)において、PPは階調制限用の最大値Pを階調の最大値Pmaxで割った値(=P/Pmax)である。以下の説明では、PP=1とする。
Next, based on the image data Ri, Gi, Bi of three colors, the minimum value Dmin, the distribution ratio WRs, the coefficient Ks, and the parameter WBR, the drive image data calculation unit 33 performs the following equations (5a) to (5d) Image data Wd, Bd, Gd, Rd of four colors are obtained according to the above (step S106).
Wd = WRs · Dmin · Ks · PP / WBR (5a)
Bd = (Bi−WRs · Dmin) Ks · PP (5b)
Gd = (Gi-WRs.Dmin) Ks.PP (5c)
Rd = (Ri-WRs-Dmin) Ks-PP (5d)
However, in the equations (5a) to (5d), PP is a value (= P / Pmax) obtained by dividing the maximum value P for tone limitation by the maximum value Pmax of tone. In the following description, it is assumed that PP = 1.
 以上のようにして画像データ変換部10は、パラメータRA,RB,WRX,WBRを用いて、入力画像データD1に含まれる各画素のデータ(入力画像のBGR画素データ値)Ri、Gi、Biから当該画素の白、青、緑、および、赤の画像データ(駆動用のWBGR画素データ値)Wd,Bd,Gd,Rdを求めることにより、駆動用画像データD2を生成する。 As described above, the image data conversion unit 10 uses the parameters RA, RB, WRX, and WBR to generate data (data of BGR pixel data of the input image) Ri, Gi, and Bi of each pixel included in the input image data D1. The driving image data D2 is generated by obtaining white, blue, green and red image data (WBGR pixel data values for driving) Wd, Bd, Gd and Rd of the pixel.
<1.3 分配割合WRsについて>
 既述のように、白サブフレーム期間Twにおける光源27の輝度を決定するパラメータWBRは1(白サブフレーム期間Twで発光する光源27の輝度は、白サブフレーム期間Tw以外で発光する光源27の輝度と同じ)であるという条件の下、分配割合WRsは50%(ステップS104)またはその近傍の値に設定される。より一般的には、本実施形態における分配割合WRsは以下のように設定される。
<About 1.3 distribution ratio WRs>
As described above, the parameter WBR for determining the luminance of the light source 27 in the white subframe period Tw is 1 (the luminance of the light source 27 emitting light in the white subframe period Tw is 1 for the light source 27 emitting in other than the white subframe period Tw). Under the condition that it is the same as the luminance), the distribution ratio WRs is set to 50% (step S104) or a value in the vicinity thereof. More generally, the distribution ratio WRs in the present embodiment is set as follows.
 駆動用画像データD2に含まれる青、緑、および、赤の画像データBd、Gd、Rdの最大値をDdmax、最小値をDdminとする。PP=1のとき、Wd、Ddmax、および、Ddminは、それぞれ、次式(6a)~(6c)で与えられる。
  Wd=WRs・Dmin・Ks/WBR      …(6a)
  Ddmax=(Dmax-WRs・Dmin)Ks …(6b)
  Ddmin=(Dmin-WRs・Dmin)Ks …(6c)
ここで、Wd<Ddminとなるように分配割合WRsを決定すると、液晶の透過率は、白サブフレーム期間Twに他のサブフレーム期間から切り替わる時には低下し、白サブフレーム期間Twから他のサブフレーム期間に切り替わる時には上昇する。後述のように本実施形態では、この点を利用して光学応答起因の混色を防止する。式(6a),(6c)を用いてWd<Ddminを解くと、次式が得られる。
  WRs<WBRo
ただし、WBRo=WBR/(1+WBR)である。一方、色割れを低減するには、分配割合WRsを大きくするのが好ましい。そこで本実施形態では、光学応答起因の混色の防止と色割れの低減の双方を考慮し、分配割合WRsはWBRo=WBR/(1+WBR)またはその近傍の値に設定される。
The maximum value of the blue, green and red image data Bd, Gd, Rd included in the driving image data D2 is Ddmax, and the minimum value is Ddmin. When PP = 1, Wd, Ddmax, and Ddmin are given by the following equations (6a) to (6c), respectively.
Wd = WRs · Dmin · Ks / WBR (6a)
Ddmax = (Dmax−WRs · Dmin) Ks (6b)
Ddmin = (Dmin-WRs · Dmin) Ks (6c)
Here, if the distribution ratio WRs is determined such that Wd <Ddmin, the transmittance of the liquid crystal decreases when switching from the other subframe period to the white subframe period Tw, and from the white subframe period Tw to the other subframes It rises when switching to a period. As described later, in the present embodiment, this point is used to prevent color mixing due to the optical response. If Wd <Ddmin is solved using equations (6a) and (6c), the following equation is obtained.
WRs <WBRo
However, it is WBRo = WBR / (1 + WBR). On the other hand, in order to reduce color breakup, it is preferable to increase the distribution ratio WRs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the distribution ratio WRs is set to WBRo = WBR / (1 + WBR) or a value in the vicinity thereof in consideration of both prevention of color mixing due to the optical response and reduction of color breakup.
<1.4 調整係数Ksについて>
 以下、調整係数Ksについて説明する(図3のステップS105)。
<1.4 Regarding the adjustment coefficient Ks>
Hereinafter, the adjustment coefficient Ks will be described (step S105 in FIG. 3).
 彩度Sと分配割合WRsは、0以上1以下の値を取る。駆動用画像データD2に含まれる白の画像データWd、ならびに、駆動用画像データD2に含まれる青、緑、および、赤の画像データBd、Gd、Rdの最大値Ddmaxおよび最小値Ddminは、それぞれ、上記式(6a)~(6c)で与えられる(ただしPP=1)。 The saturation S and the distribution ratio WRs take values of 0 or more and 1 or less. The maximum value Ddmax and the minimum value Ddmin of the white image data Wd included in the drive image data D2 and the blue, green and red image data Bd, Gd, Rd included in the drive image data D2 are respectively And the above equations (6a) to (6c) (where PP = 1).
 図4に示すように、彩度Sと分配割合WRsで示される(S,WRs)の範囲は、Ddmin<Wd<Ddmaxとなる第1エリア、Ddmax<Wdとなる第2エリア、および、Wd<Ddminとなる第3エリアに分割される。なお本実施形態では、図4に示されるWBRoは次式で与えられる。
  WBRo=WBR/(1+WBR)
As shown in FIG. 4, the range of (S, WRs) indicated by the saturation S and the distribution ratio WRs is a first area where Ddmin <Wd <Ddmax, a second area where Ddmax <Wd, and Wd < It is divided into the 3rd area which becomes Ddmin. In the present embodiment, WBRo shown in FIG. 4 is given by the following equation.
WBRo = WBR / (1 + WBR)
 (S,WRs)が第1エリア内にある場合には、DDmin=Ddmin、DDmax=Ddmaxとなる。式(6a)、(6b)を考慮し、式(1)にDmin=Dmax(1-S)を代入して式(1)を解くと、次式(20)が導かれる。
  Ks≦RB/(Dmax×[1-{WRs(1-RA)+RA}(1-S)]) …(20)
最大値Dmaxが1(入力画像データD1が取り得る最大値)のときでも式(20)が成立するように、係数Ksを次式(21)のように決定する。式(21)は、(S,WRs)が第1エリア内にある場合に、Dmax=1とする条件下で係数Ksが取り得る最大値を示す。
  Ks=RB/[1-{WRs(1-RA)+RA}(1-S)]  …(21)
なお、最大値Dmaxは入力画像データD1の明度Viである。この明度Vi=Dmax=max(Ri,Gi,Bi)を、後述の増幅圧縮処理後の明度V=Ks・Dmaxと区別するために、以下において「入力明度Vi」と呼ぶことがある。
If (S, WRs) is in the first area, then DDmin = Ddmin and DDmax = Ddmax. Taking equation (6a) and (6b) into consideration, substituting equation (1) by substituting Dmin = Dmax (1-S) into equation (1) leads to the following equation (20).
Ks ≦ RB / (Dmax × [1- {WRs (1-RA) + RA} (1-S))] (20)
The coefficient Ks is determined as in the following equation (21) so that the equation (20) holds even when the maximum value Dmax is 1 (the maximum value that the input image data D1 can take). Expression (21) indicates the maximum value that the coefficient Ks can take under the condition of Dmax = 1 when (S, WRs) is in the first area.
Ks = RB / [1- {WRs (1-RA) + RA} (1-S)] (21)
The maximum value Dmax is the lightness Vi of the input image data D1. The lightness Vi = Dmax = max (Ri, Gi, Bi) may be hereinafter referred to as “input lightness Vi” in order to distinguish it from the lightness V = Ks · Dmax after amplification and compression processing described later.
 (S,WRs)が第1エリア内に入るように分配割合WRsを決定した場合には、Ddmin<Wd<Ddmaxが成立し、駆動用画像データD2に含まれる4色の画像データWd、Bd、Gd、Rd間の差は最小になる(最大でも(Ddmax-Ddmin)になる)。この場合、分配割合WRsを用い、かつ、Dmax=1とする条件下で係数Ksが取り得る最大値は式(21)で与えられる。 When the distribution ratio WRs is determined such that (S, WRs) falls within the first area, Ddmin <Wd <Ddmax is established, and the four-color image data Wd, Bd, contained in the drive image data D2 is established. The difference between Gd and Rd is minimized (at most (Ddmax−Ddmin)). In this case, the maximum value that the coefficient Ks can take under the condition of using the distribution ratio WRs and Dmax = 1 is given by the equation (21).
 (S,WRs)が第3エリア内にある場合には、DDmin=Wd、DDmax=Ddmaxとなる。これらの式と式(6a)、(6b)とDmin=Dmax(1-S)を考慮すると、上記式(1)より次式(24)が導かれる。
  Ks≦WBR・RB/[Dmax{WBR-(WBR+RA)WRs(1-S)}]  …(24)
入力明度Viを示す最大値Dmaxが1(入力画像データD1が取り得る最大値)のときでも式(24)が成立するように、係数Ksを次式(25)のように決定する。式(24)は、(S,WRs)が第3エリア内にある場合に、Dmax=1とする条件下で係数Ksが取り得る最大値を示す。
  Ks=WBR・RB/{WBR-(WBR+RA)WRs(1-S)} …(25)
When (S, WRs) is in the third area, DDmin = Wd and DDmax = Ddmax. Considering these equations and equations (6a), (6b) and Dmin = Dmax (1-S), the following equation (24) is derived from the above equation (1).
Ks ≦ WBR · RB / [Dmax {WBR− (WBR + RA) WRs (1-S)}] (24)
The coefficient Ks is determined as in the following equation (25) so that the equation (24) holds even when the maximum value Dmax indicating the input brightness Vi is 1 (the maximum value that the input image data D1 can take). Equation (24) shows the maximum value that the coefficient Ks can take under the condition of Dmax = 1 when (S, WRs) is in the third area.
Ks = WBR.RB / {WBR- (WBR + RA) WRs (1-S)} (25)
<1.5 バックライトの駆動の詳細>
 次に、図5から図7を参照して、光源部としてのバックライト25の駆動の詳細について説明する。以下では、バックライト25は発光ダイオード(LED)を用いて構成されいてるものとするが、バックライトの構成はこれに限定されない(他の実施形態においても同様)。
<1.5 Details of backlight driving>
Next, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, details of driving of the backlight 25 as the light source unit will be described. In the following, the backlight 25 is configured using a light emitting diode (LED), but the configuration of the backlight is not limited to this (the same applies to other embodiments).
 図5は、光源駆動部回路としてのバックライト駆動回路23の構成を示すブロック図である。このバックライト駆動回路23は、点灯制御回路230とバックライト用電源回路232とから構成されている。図5に示すように点灯制御回路230は、LED制御回路231と、赤色光源用スイッチ23rと、緑色光源用スイッチ23gと、青色光源用スイッチ23bとを含んでいる。LED制御回路231は、タイミング制御回路21からのタイミング制御信号TCに基づき、赤色光源制御信号CswR、緑色光源制御信号CswG、青色光源制御信号CswBを生成して、赤色光源用スイッチ23r、緑色光源用スイッチ23g、青色光源用スイッチ23bにそれぞれ与える。赤色光源用スイッチ23rは、赤色光源制御信号CswRがハイレベル(Hレベル)のときオン状態であり、ローレベル(Lレベル)のときオフ状態である。緑色光源用スイッチ23gは、緑色光源制御信号CswGがHレベルのときオン状態であり、Lレベルのときオフ状態である。青色光源用スイッチ23bは、青色光源制御信号CswBがHレベルのときオン状態であり、Lレベルのときオフ状態である。 FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the backlight drive circuit 23 as a light source drive circuit. The backlight drive circuit 23 includes a lighting control circuit 230 and a backlight power circuit 232. As shown in FIG. 5, the lighting control circuit 230 includes an LED control circuit 231, a red light source switch 23r, a green light source switch 23g, and a blue light source switch 23b. The LED control circuit 231 generates a red light source control signal CswR, a green light source control signal CswG, and a blue light source control signal CswB based on the timing control signal TC from the timing control circuit 21, and switches the red light source switch 23r for the green light source. The switch 23g and the blue light source switch 23b are respectively provided. The red light source switch 23r is in the on state when the red light source control signal CswR is at the high level (H level), and is in the off state when the red light source control signal CswR is at the low level (L level). The green light source switch 23g is in the on state when the green light source control signal CswG is at the H level, and is in the off state when the green light source control signal CswG is at the L level. The blue light source switch 23b is on when the blue light source control signal CswB is at the H level, and is off when the blue light source control signal CswB is at the L level.
 バックライト25における赤色光源27r、緑色光源27g、青色光源27bは、赤色光源用スイッチ23r、緑色光源用スイッチ23g、青色光源用スイッチ23bをそれぞれ介してバックライト用電源回路232に接続されている。これにより、赤色光源27r、緑色光源27g、青色光源27bには、駆動用信号として赤色光源駆動信号SdvR、緑色光源駆動信号SdvG、青色光源駆動信号SdvBがそれぞれ与えられる。したがって、赤色光源27rは赤色光源制御信号CswRがHレベルのとき点灯状態、Lレベルのとき消灯状態であり、緑色光源27gは緑色光源制御信号CswGがHレベルのとき点灯状態、Lレベルのとき消灯状態であり、青色光源27bは青色光源制御信号CswBがHレベルのとき点灯状態、Lレベルのとき消灯状態である。 The red light source 27r, the green light source 27g, and the blue light source 27b in the backlight 25 are connected to the backlight power circuit 232 via the red light source switch 23r, the green light source switch 23g, and the blue light source switch 23b. As a result, the red light source drive signal SdvR, the green light source drive signal SdvG, and the blue light source drive signal SdvB are supplied as drive signals to the red light source 27r, the green light source 27g, and the blue light source 27b. Therefore, the red light source 27r is on when the red light source control signal CswR is H level and off when L level, and the green light source 27g is on when the green light source control signal CswG is H level and off when L level In the state, the blue light source 27b is in the on state when the blue light source control signal CswB is at the H level, and in the off state when the blue light source control signal CswB is at the L level.
 なお、パルス幅変調により各光源27x(x=r,g,b)の発光強度を調整可能とするために、LED制御回路231は、各光源制御信号CswX(X=R,G,B)をHレベルとする代わりに所望の発光強度に応じたデューティ比のパルス信号を出力できるように構成されている。 In order to make it possible to adjust the light emission intensity of each light source 27 x (x = r, g, b) by pulse width modulation, the LED control circuit 231 outputs each light source control signal CswX (X = R, G, B). Instead of setting the H level, it is configured to output a pulse signal of a duty ratio according to a desired light emission intensity.
 図6は、図5に示すように構成されたバックライト駆動回路23と同様のバックライト駆動回路を備えた従来のフィールドシーケンシャル方式の液晶表示装置(以下「従来の画像表示装置」または「第1従来例」という)におけるバックライトの駆動を説明するためのタイミングチャートである。本実施形態におけるバックライトの駆動を説明する前に、この第1従来例におけるバックライトの駆動を比較例として説明する。なお以下では、第1従来例における構成のうち本実施形態に係る画像表示装置と同一または対応する部分には同一の参照符号を付すものとする。 6 shows a conventional field sequential liquid crystal display device (hereinafter referred to as “conventional image display device” or “first method”) having a backlight drive circuit similar to the backlight drive circuit 23 configured as shown in FIG. It is a timing chart for explaining the driving of the backlight in the “conventional example”. Before describing driving of the backlight in the present embodiment, driving of the backlight in the first conventional example will be described as a comparative example. In the following, in the configuration of the first conventional example, the same or corresponding parts as in the image display device according to the present embodiment are given the same reference numerals.
 図6に示すように第1従来例では、各サブフレーム期間Tg,Tr,Tw,Tbの前半は、バックライト25から液晶パネル24に光が照射されない消灯期間Toffであり、後半は、バックライト25から液晶パネル24に光が照射される点灯期間Tonである。なお、図6における記号“Cft”は、タイミング制御回路21からLED制御回路231に与えられるタイミング制御信号TCに含まれるサブフレーム指示信号を示している(図7においても同様)。パネル駆動回路22は、各サブフレーム期間Tx(x=g,r,w,b)の消灯期間Toffに含まれる走査期間Tscにおいて、液晶パネル24を走査して駆動用画像データD2を構成する各画素データを液晶パネル24に順次書き込む。バックライト駆動回路23は、赤色光源制御信号CswR、緑色光源制御信号CswG、および青色光源制御信号CswBに従ってバックライト25における赤色光源27r、緑色光源27g、および青色光源27bを選択的に駆動する。図6に示す光源制御信号CswR,CswG,CswBの波形からわかるように、第1サブフレーム期間としての緑サブフレーム期間Tgでは緑色光源27gのみが、第2サブフレーム期間としての赤サブフレーム期間Trでは赤色光源27rのみが、第4サブフレーム期間としての青サブフレーム期間Tbでは青色光源27bのみが、それぞれ点灯し、第3サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twでは、赤色光源27r、緑色光源27g、および青色光源27bが同時に点灯する。これにより、緑サブフレーム期間Tg、赤サブフレーム期間Tr、白サブフレーム期間Tw、青サブフレーム期間Tbにおいて、緑色光、赤色光、白色光、青色光が液晶パネル24の背面にそれぞれ照射される。なお、図6に示す例では、緑色光源制御信号CswGは、緑色光源27gが所望の発光強度で点灯するようにパルス幅変調された信号である。 As shown in FIG. 6, in the first prior art example, the first half of each subframe period Tg, Tr, Tw, Tb is a turn-off period Toff during which light is not irradiated from the backlight 25 to the liquid crystal panel 24. The second half is a backlight 25 is a lighting period Ton during which light is emitted to the liquid crystal panel 24. The symbol "Cft" in FIG. 6 indicates a subframe indication signal included in the timing control signal TC supplied from the timing control circuit 21 to the LED control circuit 231 (the same applies to FIG. 7). The panel drive circuit 22 scans the liquid crystal panel 24 in the scanning period Tsc included in the extinguishing period Toff of each subframe period Tx (x = g, r, w, b) to form driving image data D 2. Pixel data is sequentially written to the liquid crystal panel 24. The backlight drive circuit 23 selectively drives the red light source 27r, the green light source 27g, and the blue light source 27b in the backlight 25 in accordance with the red light source control signal CswR, the green light source control signal CswG, and the blue light source control signal CswB. As can be seen from the waveforms of the light source control signals CswR, CswG, CswB shown in FIG. 6, in the green subframe period Tg as the first subframe period, only the green light source 27g serves as the red subframe period Tr as the second subframe period. Then, only the red light source 27r is turned on, and only the blue light source 27b is turned on in the blue sub-frame period Tb as the fourth sub-frame period, and the red light source 27r and the green light source are turned on in the white sub-frame period Tw as the third sub-frame period. 27 g and the blue light source 27 b are simultaneously turned on. Thus, green light, red light, white light and blue light are respectively irradiated to the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 24 in the green subframe period Tg, the red subframe period Tr, the white subframe period Tw and the blue subframe period Tb. . In the example shown in FIG. 6, the green light source control signal CswG is a pulse width modulated signal so that the green light source 27g lights up with a desired light emission intensity.
 このようにして液晶パネル24の駆動(各画素形成部30への画素データの書き込み)と共にバックライト25が駆動されることにより、入力信号Dinに基づき、緑サブフレーム期間Tgには緑画像が、赤サブフレーム期間Trには赤画像が、白サブフレーム期間Twには白画像が、青サブフレーム期間Tbには青画像がそれぞれ表示され、経時的な加法混色によるカラー画像が液晶パネル24に表示される。このような第1従来例における表示動作の詳細については後述する(図8参照)。 By driving the backlight 25 together with driving of the liquid crystal panel 24 (writing of pixel data to each pixel formation unit 30) in this manner, a green image is generated in the green subframe period Tg based on the input signal Din. A red image is displayed in the red subframe period Tr, a white image is displayed in the white subframe period Tw, and a blue image is displayed in the blue subframe period Tb, and a color image by additive color mixture over time is displayed on the liquid crystal panel 24. Be done. The details of the display operation in such a first conventional example will be described later (see FIG. 8).
 図7は、本実施形態におけるバックライト25の駆動を説明するためのタイミングチャートである。共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twの直後の原色サブフレーム期間(以下「後続サブフレーム期間」という)である青サブフレーム期間Tbを除く原色サブフレーム期間Tg,Trの前半は、バックライト25から液晶パネル24に光が照射されない消灯期間Toffであり、後半は、バックライト25から液晶パネル24に光が照射される点灯期間Tonである。共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twおよび後続サブフレーム期間としての青サブフレーム期間Tbでは、その前半および後半の双方で対応する光源が点灯する。パネル駆動回路22は、第1従来例と同様、各サブフレーム期間Tx(x=g,r,w,b)の前半に含まれる走査期間Tscにおいて、液晶パネル24を走査して駆動用画像データD2を構成する各画素データを液晶パネル24に順次書き込む。バックライト駆動回路23は、赤色光源制御信号CswR、緑色光源制御信号CswG、および青色光源制御信号CswBに従ってバックライト25における赤色光源27r、緑色光源27g、および青色光源27bを選択的に駆動する。図7に示す光源制御信号CswR,CswG,CswBの波形からわかるように、第1サブフレーム期間としての緑サブフレーム期間Tgでは緑色光源27gのみが、第2サブフレーム期間としての赤サブフレーム期間Trでは赤色光源27rのみが、第4サブフレーム期間としての青サブフレーム期間Tbでは青色光源27bのみが、それぞれ点灯し、第3サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twでは、その前半期間で赤色光源27rが点灯し、その後半期間で赤色光源27r、緑色光源27g、および青色光源27bが同時に点灯する。これにより、緑サブフレーム期間Tg,赤サブフレーム期間Tr,白サブフレーム期間Tw,青サブフレーム期間Tbにおいて、緑色光、赤色光、白色光、青色光が液晶パネル24の背面にそれぞれ照射される。ただし、白サブフレーム期間Twでは、バックライト25の発光色は、白表示の入力画像データD1が与えられた場合に表示される白色(以下「白表示における白色」という)から赤方向に若干シフトしている(詳細は後述)。 FIG. 7 is a timing chart for explaining the driving of the backlight 25 in the present embodiment. The first half of the primary color sub-frame periods Tg, Tr excluding the blue sub-frame period Tb which is a primary color sub-frame period (hereinafter referred to as “following sub-frame period”) immediately after the white sub-frame period Tw as a common color sub-frame period The light-off period Toff during which light is not emitted from the light 25 to the liquid crystal panel 24 is a lighting period Ton during which light is emitted from the backlight 25 to the liquid crystal panel 24 in the second half. In the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period and the blue subframe period Tb as the subsequent subframe period, the corresponding light sources are lit in both the first half and the second half. The panel drive circuit 22 scans the liquid crystal panel 24 in the scanning period Tsc included in the first half of each sub-frame period Tx (x = g, r, w, b) as in the first conventional example, and generates driving image data. The respective pixel data constituting D 2 are sequentially written to the liquid crystal panel 24. The backlight drive circuit 23 selectively drives the red light source 27r, the green light source 27g, and the blue light source 27b in the backlight 25 in accordance with the red light source control signal CswR, the green light source control signal CswG, and the blue light source control signal CswB. As can be seen from the waveforms of the light source control signals CswR, CswG, and CswB shown in FIG. 7, only the green light source 27g is used in the green subframe period Tg as the first subframe period, and the red subframe period Tr as the second subframe period. Then, only the red light source 27r is turned on, and only the blue light source 27b is turned on in the blue sub-frame period Tb as the fourth sub-frame period, and in the white sub-frame period Tw as the third sub-frame period The light source 27r is turned on, and the red light source 27r, the green light source 27g, and the blue light source 27b are simultaneously turned on in the second half period. Thus, green light, red light, white light and blue light are respectively irradiated to the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 24 in the green subframe period Tg, the red subframe period Tr, the white subframe period Tw and the blue subframe period Tb. . However, in the white subframe period Tw, the light emission color of the backlight 25 is slightly shifted in the red direction from white (hereinafter referred to as “white in white display”) displayed when the input image data D1 for white display is given. (Details will be described later).
 このようにして本実施形態においても、液晶パネル24の駆動(各画素形成部30への画素データの書き込み)と共にバックライト25が駆動されることにより、入力信号Dinに基づき、緑サブフレーム期間Tgには緑画像が、赤サブフレーム期間Trには赤画像が、白サブフレーム期間Twには白画像が、青サブフレーム期間Tbには青画像がそれぞれ表示され、経時的な加法混色によるカラー画像が液晶パネル24に表示される。このような本実施形態における表示動作の詳細については後述する(図9参照)。なお以下では、赤色光源27rとして赤の発光ダイオード(以下「R-LED」という)が、緑色光源27gとして緑の発光ダイオード(以下「G-LED」という)が、青色光源27bとして青の発光ダイオード(以下「B-LED」という)がそれぞれ使用されるものとする(他の実施形態においても同様)。 Thus, in the present embodiment as well, driving of the liquid crystal panel 24 (writing of pixel data to each pixel formation unit 30) and driving of the backlight 25 allow the green sub-frame period Tg based on the input signal Din. The green image is displayed in the red subframe period Tr, the white image is displayed in the white subframe period Tw, and the blue image is displayed in the blue subframe period Tb. Is displayed on the liquid crystal panel 24. Details of the display operation in this embodiment will be described later (see FIG. 9). In the following, a red light emitting diode (hereinafter referred to as "R-LED") as red light source 27r, a green light emitting diode (hereinafter referred to as "G-LED") as green light source 27g, and a blue light emitting diode as blue light source 27b It is assumed that each (hereinafter referred to as "B-LED") is used (the same applies to other embodiments).
<1.6 表示動作>
 図8(A)は、バックライト25が図6に示すように駆動される第1従来例の表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図8(B)は、この第1従来例における各光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯時間を示す図である。ここでは、説明の便宜上、白サブフレーム期間Twで発光する光源27の輝度は白サブフレーム期間Tw以外の期間で発光する光源27の輝度と同一、すなわちWBR=1であるものとする。図8(A)におけるタイミングチャートは、赤色光源27rとしてのR-LED、緑色光源27gとしてのG-LED、青色光源27bとしてのB-LEDの各サブフレーム期間Tx(x=g,r,w,b)での点灯/消灯を示し、図8(A)下部における2つの波形図は、白を表示する場合および赤を表示する場合それぞれの液晶パネル24における液晶の応答をバックライト25の点灯状態とともに示している。図8(A)の当該2つの波形図では液晶の応答(透過率の時間的変化)が太い点線で示されている。また図8(B)には、1フレーム期間Tfrにおける原色サブフレーム期間(RGB-SF)での3原色光源(赤色光源(R-LED)、緑色光源(G-LED)、青色光源(B-LED))それぞれの点灯時間の長さ、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Tw(W-SF)での3原色光源(R-LED,G-LED,B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間の長さ、ならびに、1フレーム期間Tfr(TOTAL)での3原色光源(R-LED,G-LED,B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間の長さを示している。ここで点灯時間は、1フレーム期間Tfrの長さを“1”とする相対値(デューティ比)として示されており、「原色サブフレーム期間」とは、赤サブフレーム期間Tr、緑サブフレーム期間Tg、および、青サブフレーム期間Tbの総称である。図8における上記表現方法は、図9、図14~図29においても採用されているものとする。
<1.6 Display operation>
FIG. 8A is a timing chart and waveform diagram for explaining the display operation of the first conventional example in which the backlight 25 is driven as shown in FIG. 6, and FIG. 8B shows the first example. It is a figure which shows the lighting time of each light source (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in a prior art example. Here, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the luminance of the light source 27 emitting in the white subframe period Tw is the same as the luminance of the light source 27 emitting in the period other than the white subframe period Tw, that is, WBR = 1. The timing chart in FIG. 8A shows sub-frame periods Tx (x = g, r, w) of the R-LED as the red light source 27r, the G-LED as the green light source 27g, and the B-LED as the blue light source 27b. , And b), and the two waveform diagrams in the lower part of FIG. 8A indicate the response of the liquid crystal in each liquid crystal panel 24 when displaying white and displaying red. It shows with the state. In the two waveform diagrams in FIG. 8A, the response of liquid crystal (temporal change in transmittance) is indicated by a thick dotted line. In FIG. 8B, three primary color light sources (red light source (R-LED), green light source (G-LED), blue light source (B-) in the primary color sub-frame period (RGB-SF) in one frame period Tfr. LED) Length of each lighting time, lighting time of each of three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in white subframe period Tw (W-SF) as common color subframe period And the length of lighting time of each of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in one frame period Tfr (TOTAL). Here, the lighting time is shown as a relative value (duty ratio) in which the length of one frame period Tfr is "1", and the "primary color subframe period" means a red subframe period Tr, a green subframe period. It is a generic term for Tg and blue subframe period Tb. The above expression method in FIG. 8 is also adopted in FIGS. 9 and 14 to 29.
 また第1従来例では、1フレーム期間における3原色光源(R-LED,G-LED,B-LED)の点灯時間の割合(すなわちデューティ比の割合)は1:2/3:1であり(図8(B)の“TOTAL”参照)、白バランスをとるための3原色光源の点灯時間の割合(デューティ比の割合)が1:2/3:1となるように、各光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯時の電流値が予め設定されているものとする。さらに、各サブフレーム期間の中央の時刻(1サブフレーム期間の50%に相当する時刻)が発光制御基準時点tecrとして予め設定されており、第1従来例では、各サブフレーム期間で光源が点灯する場合は、この発光制御基準時点tecrから点灯が開始される。各サブフレーム期間において発光制御基準時点tecrよりも前の期間(前半期間)には、液晶の応答が過渡状態(遷移状態)にある期間も含まれており、各サブフレーム期間においてその始点から発光制御基準時点tecrまでは光源の点灯を抑制すべき時間である。また、発光制御基準時点tecrは、各サブフレーム期間において液晶の応答特性の観点から光源の発光を抑制すべき時間の終了時点に設定するのが好ましいが、これに限定されない。発光制御基準時点tecrを光源の発光を抑制すべき時間の終了時点に設定した場合、当該サブフレーム期間における発光制御基準時点tecrからその終点までの時間が最大光源点灯時間に相当する。この最大光源点灯時間は、液晶の応答特性による混色色相のずれを回避しつつ各サブフレーム期間で確保できる最大の点灯時間に相当する。以下の各実施形態においても、このような観点から発光制御基準時点tecrが設定されているものとする。なお以下においても、各サブフレーム期間の中央の時刻(1サブフレーム期間の50%に相当する時刻)を発光制御基準時点tecrとしているが、発光制御基準時点tecrは、これに限定されるものではなく、液晶の応答特性および液晶パネル24への画素データの書込速度等を考慮して決定されるべきものである。 In the first conventional example, the ratio of the lighting time of three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in one frame period (that is, the ratio of the duty ratio) is 1: 2/3: 1 ( Each light source (R-) is set such that the ratio of the lighting time (ratio of duty ratio) of the three primary color light sources for white balance is 1: 2/3: 1 (see “TOTAL” in FIG. 8B). It is assumed that current values at the time of lighting of the LED, G-LED, and B-LED are set in advance. Furthermore, the central time of each sub-frame period (the time corresponding to 50% of one sub-frame period) is preset as the light emission control reference time point tecr, and in the first conventional example, the light source is turned on in each sub-frame period When it does, lighting is started from this light emission control reference time point tecr. The period (first half period) before the light emission control reference time point tecr in each subframe period includes the period in which the response of the liquid crystal is in the transition state (transition state), and light emission from the start point in each subframe period Until the control reference time point tecr is the time to suppress the lighting of the light source. In addition, although it is preferable to set the light emission control reference time point tecr to an end time point of time in which the light emission of the light source is to be suppressed from the viewpoint of the response characteristic of the liquid crystal in each sub-frame period, it is not limited thereto. When the light emission control reference time point tecr is set to the end time of the time to suppress the light emission of the light source, the time from the light emission control reference time point tecr to the end point in the subframe period corresponds to the maximum light source lighting time. The maximum light source lighting time corresponds to the maximum lighting time that can be secured in each sub-frame period while avoiding the color mixing hue shift due to the response characteristic of the liquid crystal. Also in the following embodiments, it is assumed that the light emission control reference time point tecr is set from such a viewpoint. Also in the following, the central time of each subframe period (the time corresponding to 50% of one subframe period) is used as the light emission control reference time point tecr, but the light emission control reference time point tecr is limited to this. However, it should be determined in consideration of the response characteristics of the liquid crystal, the writing speed of the pixel data to the liquid crystal panel 24, and the like.
 図9(A)は、バックライト25が図7に示すように駆動される本実施形態における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図9(B)は本実施形態における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間および発光量を示す図である。本実施形態では、1フレーム期間Tfrにおける3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯時間の割合は1.5:1:1.5であり(図9(B)の“TOTAL”参照)、白バランスをとるための3原色光源の点灯時間の割合が1:1.5:1となるように、各光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯時の電流値が予め設定されている。本実施形態では、図7に示した赤色光源制御信号CswR、緑色光源制御信号CswG、および青色光源制御信号CswBに従ってバックライト25が駆動されるとともに、既述の駆動用画像データD2に基づきパネル駆動回路22により液晶パネル24が駆動されることにより、図9(A)に示すように、バックライト25における各光源27r、27g、27bが点灯し、液晶パネル24における液晶が応答する。 FIG. 9A is a timing chart and a waveform diagram for explaining the display operation in the present embodiment in which the backlight 25 is driven as shown in FIG. 7, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the lighting time and light-emission quantity of each primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED). In the present embodiment, the ratio of the lighting time of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in one frame period Tfr is 1.5: 1: 1.5 (see FIG. 9B). Lighting of each light source (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) so that the ratio of lighting time of three primary color light sources for white balance is 1: 1.5: 1 (see “TOTAL”) The hour current value is preset. In this embodiment, the backlight 25 is driven according to the red light source control signal CswR, the green light source control signal CswG, and the blue light source control signal CswB shown in FIG. 7, and the panel is driven based on the drive image data D2 described above. As the liquid crystal panel 24 is driven by the circuit 22, as shown in FIG. 9A, the light sources 27r, 27g and 27b in the backlight 25 are turned on, and the liquid crystal in the liquid crystal panel 24 responds.
 図9(B)の下部における棒グラフは、1フレーム期間Tfrにおける白サブフレーム期間Tw(W-SF)での3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの発光量、および、1フレーム期間Tfr(TOTAL)における3原色光源それぞれの発光量を示している(このような表現方法は、図15、図17、図19、図20、図21、図23、図24、図26、図27、28、図29においても採用されているものとする)。バックライト25の3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時における電流値が上記のように設定されていることから(図9(B)の下部右側の棒グラフ参照)、本実施形態において白表示を示す入力画像データD1が与えられた場合には液晶パネル24に白色が表示される。ただし、白サブフレーム期間Twでの3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯時間の割合である1、0.5、0.5にそれぞれ対応する赤、緑、青の発光量は、各光源(LED)の点灯時における電流値についての上記設定に基づき、青、赤、緑の順に多くなる(図9(B)の下部左側の棒グラフ参照)。その結果、白サブフレーム期間Twでのバックライト25の発光色は白表示における白色から赤方向にシフトしている。 The bar graph in the lower part of FIG. 9B shows the light emission amount of each of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in the white subframe period Tw (W-SF) in one frame period Tfr. , And the amount of light emission of each of the three primary color light sources in one frame period Tfr (TOTAL). (Such an expression method is shown in FIG. 15, FIG. 17, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 23, FIG. 26, 27, 28 and 29). Since the current values at the time of lighting each of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 are set as described above (see the bar graph on the lower right of FIG. 9B) When the input image data D1 showing white display in the present embodiment is given, white is displayed on the liquid crystal panel 24. However, red, green, and blue corresponding to ratios of 1, 0.5, and 0.5, which are ratios of lighting times of three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in the white subframe period Tw, respectively. The amount of light emission increases in the order of blue, red, and green based on the above setting of the current value at the time of lighting of each light source (LED) (see the bar graph on the lower left of FIG. 9B). As a result, the light emission color of the backlight 25 in the white subframe period Tw shifts from white in the white display to the red direction.
 本実施形態において赤表示を示す入力画像データD1が与えられた場合には、白サブフレーム期間Twの前半において赤色光源27rが点灯するので、図9(A)下部の波形図に示すように、色相ずれを抑えつつ第1従来例よりも光源(LED)の1灯あたりの発光光量が増加する。 In the present embodiment, when the input image data D1 indicating red display is given, the red light source 27r is turned on in the first half of the white sub-frame period Tw, as shown in the waveform diagram in the lower part of FIG. The amount of light emitted per light source (LED) is increased more than in the first conventional example while suppressing the hue shift.
<1.7 作用および効果>
 図10は、本実施形態に係る画像表示装置において表示すべき色(以下「目標色」という)を変えた場合の表示動作を示す図である。図10では、白(W)、白とシアンの混色(W+C)、白と赤の混色(W+R)、シアン(C)、赤(R)、緑(G)、黄(Y)、青(B)、マゼンタ(M)をそれぞれ目標色とする9つの場合(以下、それぞれ「ケース(1)」~「ケース(9)」という)について、本実施形態における入力画像データD1、駆動用画像データD2、および、表示動作(液晶の応答状態および光源としてのLEDの動作状態)を示しており、比較例として、分配割合WRsが100%である従来構成の画像表示装置において白を目標色とする場合(以下「ケース(10)」という)における駆動用画像データおよび表示動作も示されている。なお図10では、表示動作を表す波形図において太い点線は液晶の応答(透過率の時間的変化)を示している。
<1.7 Action and Effect>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display operation when the color to be displayed (hereinafter referred to as “target color”) is changed in the image display device according to the present embodiment. In FIG. 10, white (W), mixed color of white and cyan (W + C), mixed color of white and red (W + R), cyan (C), red (R), green (G), yellow (Y), blue (B) The input image data D1 and the driving image data D2 in the present embodiment for nine cases (hereinafter referred to as “case (1)” to “case (9)”) in which magenta (M) is the target color, respectively. And a display operation (a response state of a liquid crystal and an operation state of an LED as a light source), and a white color is set as a target color in a conventional image display device having a distribution ratio WRs of 100% as a comparative example. The drive image data and display operation (hereinafter referred to as "case (10)") are also shown. In FIG. 10, thick dotted lines in the waveform diagram showing display operation indicate the response of liquid crystal (temporal change of transmittance).
 本実施形態では、分配割合WRsがWBRo=WBR/(1+WBR)となるように(WBR=1のときに50%となるように)駆動用画像データD2における4色の画像データWd,Bd,Gd,Rdが求められ(図3のステップS104)、Wd≦Ddminとなる。このため、白サブフレーム期間Twの駆動用画像データとしての白画像データWdの値は、その白サブフレーム期間の直前の原色サブフレーム期間(以下「先行サブフレーム期間」という)である赤サブフレーム期間Trの駆動用画像データとしての赤画像データRdの値と同じかまたは当該赤画像データRdの値よりも小さく、また、その白サブフレーム期間の直後の原色サブフレーム期間(後続サブフレーム期間)である青サブフレーム期間Tbの駆動用画像データとしての青画像データBdの値と同じかまたは当該青画像データBdの値よりも小さい。これにより、液晶パネル24の各画素26において、先行サブフレーム期間としての赤サブフレーム期間Trから共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twに切り替わる時に液晶の透過率が低下する方向に変化し、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twから後続サブフレーム期間としての青サブフレーム期間Tbに切り替わる時に液晶の透過率が上昇する方向に変化する。すなわち、図10におけるケース(1)~(9)の波形図に示すように、本実施形態における液晶応答(液晶パネル24の光学応答)は、赤サブフレーム期間(先行サブフレーム期間)Trから白サブフレーム期間(共通色サブフレーム期間)Twに切り替わる時には必ずディケイ応答となり、白サブフレーム期間(共通色サブフレーム期間)Twから青サブフレーム期間(後続サブフレーム期間)Tbに切り替わる時には必ずライズ応答となる。 In the present embodiment, the four-color image data Wd, Bd, and Gd in the driving image data D2 are set such that the distribution ratio WRs becomes WBRo = WBR / (1 + WBR) (50% when WBR = 1). , Rd are obtained (step S104 in FIG. 3), and Wd ≦ Ddmin. Therefore, the value of the white image data Wd as driving image data in the white subframe period Tw is a red subframe which is a primary color subframe period (hereinafter referred to as “preceding subframe period”) immediately before the white subframe period. The primary color sub-frame period (following sub-frame period) which is the same as or smaller than the value of the red image data Rd as driving image data of the period Tr and immediately after the white sub-frame period The value is the same as or smaller than the value of the blue image data Bd as driving image data of the blue subframe period Tb. As a result, in each pixel 26 of the liquid crystal panel 24, the transmittance of the liquid crystal is reduced when switching from the red subframe period Tr as the preceding subframe period to the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period. When switching from the white sub-frame period Tw as the common color sub-frame period to the blue sub-frame period Tb as the subsequent sub-frame period, the transmittance of the liquid crystal increases. That is, as shown in the waveform diagrams of cases (1) to (9) in FIG. 10, the liquid crystal response (optical response of the liquid crystal panel 24) in this embodiment is white from the red subframe period (preceding subframe period) Tr. Whenever it switches to a subframe period (common color subframe period) Tw, it becomes a decay response, and when it switches from a white subframe period (common color subframe period) Tw to a blue subframe period (following subframe period) Tb, it always becomes a rise response. Become.
 また本実施形態では、図9(A)に示すように、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて先行サブフレーム期間としての赤サブフレーム期間Trに対応する色の光源である赤色光源27r(R-LED)が点灯を開始する相対時刻(当該白サブフレーム期間の始点t3を基準とする時刻)は、先行サブフレーム期間および後続サブフレーム期間以外の原色サブフレーム期間である緑サブフレーム期間Tgにおいて光源27g(G-LED)が点灯を開始する相対時刻(緑サブフレーム期間Tgにおけるその始点t1を基準とする点灯開始時刻tecr)よりも早い。さらに図9(A)に示すように、後続サブフレーム期間としての青サブフレーム期間Tbにおいて光源27b(B-LED)が点灯を開始する相対時刻(青サブフレーム期間におけるその始点t4を基準とする時刻)は、先行サブフレーム期間および後続サブフレーム期間以外の原色サブフレーム期間である緑サブフレーム期間Tgにおいて光源27g(G-LED)が点灯を開始する相対時刻(緑サブフレーム期間Tgにおけるその始点t1を基準とする点灯開始時刻tecr)よりも早い。 In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9A, a red light source which is a light source of a color corresponding to a red subframe period Tr as a preceding subframe period in the white subframe period Tw as a common color subframe period. The relative time (the time based on the start point t3 of the white subframe period) at which the 27r (R-LED) starts lighting is a green subframe that is a primary color subframe period other than the preceding subframe period and the subsequent subframe period. It is earlier than the relative time (lighting start time tecr with reference to the start point t1 in the green subframe period Tg) that the light source 27g (G-LED) starts lighting in the period Tg. Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, the relative time (light source point in the blue subframe period t4) at which the light source 27b (B-LED) starts lighting in the blue subframe period Tb as the subsequent subframe period is used as a reference. Time) is a relative time (lighting start time in the green subframe period Tg) at which the light source 27g (G-LED) starts lighting in the green subframe period Tg which is a primary color subframe period other than the preceding subframe period and the subsequent subframe period It is earlier than the lighting start time tecr) based on t1.
 本実施形態における上記構成によれば、赤サブフレーム期間Tr(先行サブフレーム期間)から白サブフレーム期間Tw(共通色サブフレーム期間)に切り替わる時には液晶の応答はディケイ応答となるので、白サブフレーム期間Twの前半において赤色光源(R-LED)が点灯しても彩度低下や色相ずれ等の問題は生じない。また、白サブフレーム期間Tw(共通色サブフレーム期間)から青サブフレーム期間Tb(後続サブフレーム期間)に切り替わる時には液晶の応答はライズ応答となるので、青サブフレーム期間Tbの前半において青色光源(B-LED)が点灯しても混色は発生しない。したがって本実施形態によれば、彩度低下や色相ずれ等の問題を生じさせることなく、各色の輝度を向上させることができる。また、各色の光源(各色LED)が点灯しない期間すなわちバックライト25からの発光に関する時間的な空隙が少なくなるので、光源(LED)の個数を増やすことなく表示輝度を向上させることができる。 According to the above configuration in the present embodiment, when switching from the red subframe period Tr (preceding subframe period) to the white subframe period Tw (common color subframe period), the response of the liquid crystal becomes a decay response. Even if the red light source (R-LED) is turned on in the first half of the period Tw, problems such as saturation reduction and hue shift do not occur. Also, when switching from the white subframe period Tw (common color subframe period) to the blue subframe period Tb (following subframe period), the response of the liquid crystal is a rise response, so the blue light source Even if the B-LED) lights up, color mixing does not occur. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the luminance of each color without causing problems such as saturation reduction and hue shift. In addition, since the time gap between light sources of the respective colors (each color LED) is not lighted, that is, the time gap for light emission from the backlight 25 is reduced, the display brightness can be improved without increasing the number of light sources (LEDs).
<1.8 分配割合に関する変形例>
 上記第1の実施形態では、入力画像の各画素の表示のために1フレーム期間Tfrで発すべき白色成分の表示光量のうち白サブフレーム期間Twで発すべき表示光量の割合すなわち分配割合WRsは、パラメータWRXの値によって決定され、50%である(図3のステップS104参照)。ただし、白サブフレーム期間における光源27の輝度を決定するパラメータWBRは1であるものとする。より一般的には、分配割合WRsとして設定すべき値はWBR/(1+WBR)である。また、パラメータWRXの設定により、分配割合WRsを50%近傍の固定値(より一般的にはWBR/(1+WBR)近傍の固定値)としてもよい。分配割合WRsが50%近傍の所定範囲内であれば、先行サブフレーム期間(赤サブフレーム期間Tr)から共通色サブフレーム期間(白サブフレーム期間Tw)に切り替わる時に液晶の応答が概ねディケイ応答となり、共通色サブフレーム期間(白サブフレーム期間Tw)の前半において赤色光源(R-LED)が点灯して色ずれが発生したとしても人間の視覚上の許容範囲内となるからであり、また、共通色サブフレーム期間(白サブフレーム期間Tw)から後続サブフレーム期間(青サブフレーム期間Tb)に切り替わる時に液晶の応答が概ねライズ応答となり、後続サブフレーム期間(青サブフレーム期間Tb)の前半において青色光源(B-LED)が点灯して色ずれが発生しても人間の視覚上の許容範囲内となるからである。
<1.8 Modification Example Regarding Distribution Ratio>
In the first embodiment, the ratio of the amount of display light to be emitted in the white subframe period Tw to the amount of display light of the white component to be emitted in one frame period Tfr for displaying each pixel of the input image, that is, the distribution ratio WRs is It is determined by the value of the parameter WRX and is 50% (see step S104 in FIG. 3). However, the parameter WBR for determining the luminance of the light source 27 in the white subframe period is assumed to be 1. More generally, the value to be set as the distribution ratio WRs is WBR / (1 + WBR). The distribution ratio WRs may be set to a fixed value near 50% (more generally, a fixed value near WBR / (1 + WBR)) by setting the parameter WRX. If the distribution ratio WRs is within a predetermined range near 50%, the response of the liquid crystal is substantially a decay response when switching from the preceding subframe period (red subframe period Tr) to the common color subframe period (white subframe period Tw) Even if the red light source (R-LED) is turned on in the first half of the common color sub-frame period (white sub-frame period Tw) and a color shift occurs, it is within the human visual tolerance. When switching from the common color subframe period (white subframe period Tw) to the subsequent subframe period (blue subframe period Tb), the response of the liquid crystal substantially becomes a rise response, and in the first half of the subsequent subframe period (blue subframe period Tb) This is because even if a blue light source (B-LED) is turned on and a color shift occurs, it is within the human visual tolerance.
 また分配割合WRsは、人間の視覚上で色ずれを許容できる50%近傍の所定範囲内(より一般的にはWBR/(1+WBR)近傍の所定範囲内)であれば、入力画像の各画素の彩度や明度に応じて変化してもよい。以下、上記第1の実施形態において分配割合WRsに関する構成をこのように変形した例を説明する。 The distribution ratio WRs is within a predetermined range around 50% where color shift can be tolerated by human vision (more generally, within a predetermined range near WBR / (1 + WBR)). It may change according to the saturation or the lightness. Hereinafter, an example in which the configuration related to the distribution ratio WRs in the first embodiment is modified as described above will be described.
 本変形例に係る画像表示装置は、分配割合WRsが固定値(WRX≒50%)ではなく、彩度Sや明度に応じて変化する関数として与えられるが、その他の構成は上記第1の実施形態と同様であり、図1に示すような構成を有している。以下では、本変形例に係る画像表示装置の構成のうち上記第1の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成と同一または対応する部分には同一の参照符号を付し、詳しい説明を省略する。 The image display apparatus according to the present modification is provided with the distribution ratio WRs not as a fixed value (WRX ≒ 50%) but as a function that changes according to the saturation S or the lightness, but the other configuration is the first embodiment. It is similar to the form, and has a configuration as shown in FIG. In the following, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present modification, the same reference numerals are given to portions that are the same as or correspond to the configuration of the image display device according to the first embodiment.
 まず、彩度Sの関数としての分配割合WRsを第1例として説明する。以下、この第1例の分配割合を別例の分配割合と区別するために「第1分配割合WRs1」とも呼ぶものとする。 First, the distribution ratio WRs as a function of the saturation S will be described as a first example. Hereinafter, in order to distinguish the distribution ratio of the first example from the distribution ratio of another example, it is also referred to as “first distribution ratio WRs1”.
 彩度Sと分配割合WRsは、0以上1以下の値を取る。駆動用画像データD2に含まれる青、緑、および、赤の画像データBd、Gd、Rdの最大値をDdmax、最小値をDdminとする。PP=1のとき、Wd、Ddmax、および、Ddminは、それぞれ、次式(6a)~(6c)で与えられる。
  Wd=WRs・Dmin・Ks/WBR      …(6a)
  Ddmax=(Dmax-WRs・Dmin)Ks …(6b)
  Ddmin=(Dmin-WRs・Dmin)Ks …(6c)
Dmax=Dmin/(1-S)を考慮して、Wd<Ddmaxを解くと、次式(7a)が導かれる。Wd>Ddminを解くと、次式(7b)が導かれる。
  WRs<WBRo/(1-S) …(7a)
  WRs>WBRo       …(7b)
ただし、本変形例では、白サブフレーム期間Twにおける光源27の輝度を決定するパラメータWBRが1であるものとする。このため、式(7a)と(7b)において、WBRo=1/2である。
The saturation S and the distribution ratio WRs take values of 0 or more and 1 or less. The maximum value of the blue, green and red image data Bd, Gd, Rd included in the driving image data D2 is Ddmax, and the minimum value is Ddmin. When PP = 1, Wd, Ddmax, and Ddmin are given by the following equations (6a) to (6c), respectively.
Wd = WRs · Dmin · Ks / WBR (6a)
Ddmax = (Dmax−WRs · Dmin) Ks (6b)
Ddmin = (Dmin-WRs · Dmin) Ks (6c)
When Wd <Ddmax is solved in consideration of Dmax = Dmin / (1-S), the following equation (7a) is derived. The following equation (7b) is derived by solving Wd> Ddmin.
WRs <WBRo / (1-S) (7a)
WRs> WBRo ... (7b)
However, in the present modification, it is assumed that the parameter WBR for determining the luminance of the light source 27 in the white subframe period Tw is one. For this reason, in the equations (7a) and (7b), WBRo = 1/2.
 上記式(7a),(7b)を満たす分配割合WRsとして、例えば下記式(8a)~(8c)により定義される第1分配割合WRs1を採用することができる。
 a)WRX≧Ts かつ 1-S<WBRx のとき
    WRs1=WRX-WRX(1-S)2/(3・WBRx2)  …(8a)
 b)WRX≧Ts かつ 1-S≧WBRx のとき
    WRs1=WBRo/(1-S)         …(8b)
 c)WRX<Ts のとき
    WRs1=(WBRo-WRX)(1-S)2+WRX      …(8c)
ただし、式(8a)~(8c)において、WBRo=1/2、Ts=3/4、WBRx=3/(4WRX)である。
As the distribution ratio WRs satisfying the above formulas (7a) and (7b), for example, a first distribution ratio WRs1 defined by the following formulas (8a) to (8c) can be adopted.
a) When WRX ≧ Ts and 1−S <WBRx WRs1 = WRX−WRX (1−S) 2 / (3 · WBRx 2 ) (8a)
b) When WRX ≧ Ts and 1−S ≧ WBRx WRs1 = WBRo / (1-S) (8b)
c) When WRX <Ts WRs1 = (WBRo-WRX) (1-S) 2 + WRX (8c)
However, in the formulas (8a) to (8c), WBRo = 1/2, Ts = 3/4, and WBRx = 3 / (4WRX).
 図11は、この第1分配割合WRs1のグラフを示す図である。WRX<Ts(=3/4)のときに第1分配割合WRs1を求める関数は、S=0のときに値WBRo(=1/2)を取り、S=1のときに最大値WRXを取る2次関数である。WRX≧Tsのときに第1分配割合WRs1を求める関数は、1-S≧WBRxでは分数関数WRs1=1/{2(1-S)}であり、1-S<WBRxではS=1のときに最大値WRXを取る2次関数である。後者の関数は、前者の関数のグラフと後者の関数のグラフが点(WBRx,WBRo/(1-WBRx))で接するように決定される。図11に示すグラフは、常に、図4に示す第1エリア内にある。このような第1分配割合WRs1を白サブフレームの分配割合WRsとして使用することにより、4色の画像データWd、Bd、Gd、Rd間の差を最小にすることができる。 FIG. 11 is a graph showing the first distribution ratio WRs1. The function for obtaining the first distribution ratio WRs1 when WRX <Ts (= 3/4) takes the value WBRo (= 1/2) when S = 0 and takes the maximum value WRX when S = 1 It is a quadratic function. The function for obtaining the first distribution ratio WRs1 when WRX ≧ Ts is the fractional function WRs1 = 1 / {2 (1-S)} when 1−S ≧ WBRx, and when S = 1 when 1−S <WBRx Is a quadratic function that takes the maximum value WRX. The latter function is determined such that the graph of the former function and the graph of the latter function are in contact at a point (WBRx, WBRo / (1-WBRx)). The graph shown in FIG. 11 is always in the first area shown in FIG. By using such a first distribution ratio WRs1 as the distribution ratio WRs of the white subframe, the difference between the four color image data Wd, Bd, Gd, and Rd can be minimized.
 このような第1分配割合WRs1を使用する構成では、表示階調が低いほど画素26の応答速度が遅い場合には、パラメータWRXを1に近い値に設定し、表示階調が高いほど画素26の応答速度が遅い場合には、パラメータWRXを0.5に近い値に設定する。これにより、画像表示装置1の色再現性を高くすることができる。ただし本変形例では、色ずれが人間の視覚上の許容範囲内となるように分配割合WRsを50%近傍の値とするために、図11より、パラメータWRXが例えば0.5~0.6程度に設定される。 In the configuration using such a first distribution ratio WRs1, when the response speed of the pixel 26 is slower as the display tone is lower, the parameter WRX is set to a value closer to 1, and the pixel 26 is higher as the display tone is higher. When the response speed of is slow, the parameter WRX is set to a value close to 0.5. Thereby, the color reproducibility of the image display device 1 can be enhanced. However, in this modification, in order to set the distribution ratio WRs to a value close to 50% so that the color shift is within the visual tolerance of human, according to FIG. Set to a degree.
 次に、増幅圧縮処理後の明度の関数である分配割合WRsを第2例として説明する。以下、この第2例の分配割合を別例の分配割合と区別するために「第2分配割合WRsv2」ともいう。また、以下の説明では、V=Dmax・Ks、Dmin=Dmax(1-S)を考慮して計算を行う。ここで、Dmaxは入力明度Viを示し、Vは増幅圧縮処理後の明度(以下「調整明度」ともいう)を示す。さらに以下では、パラメータ記憶部11には、既述のパラメータRA,RB,WRX,WBRに加えてパラメータWRZを記憶しており、統計値/彩度演算部12は、上記の第1分配割合WRs1とこのパラメータWRZを用いて第2分配割合WRsv2を求める。 Next, a distribution ratio WRs, which is a function of lightness after amplification and compression, will be described as a second example. Hereinafter, in order to distinguish the distribution ratio of the second example from the distribution ratio of another example, it is also referred to as “second distribution ratio WRsv2”. In the following description, calculation is performed in consideration of V = Dmax · Ks and Dmin = Dmax (1-S). Here, Dmax indicates the input lightness Vi, and V indicates the lightness after the amplification and compression processing (hereinafter also referred to as “adjusted lightness”). Furthermore, in the following, the parameter storage unit 11 stores the parameter WRZ in addition to the parameters RA, RB, WRX, and WBR described above, and the statistical value / saturation calculation unit 12 calculates the first distribution ratio WRs1. And the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is calculated using the parameter WRZ.
 (S,WRs1)が図4に示す第1エリア内にある場合には、DDmin=Ddmin、DDmax=Ddmaxとなる。したがって、Ddmax≦RA・Ddmin+RBより、この場合の第2分配割合WRsv2の最小値WRsvaは下記式(27a)で与えられる。(S,WRs1)が図4に示す第2エリア内にある場合には、DDmin=Ddmin、DDmax=Wdとなる。したがって、Wd≦RA・Ddmin+RBより、この場合の第2分配割合WRsv2の最大値WRsvbは下記式(27b)で与えられる。(S,WRs1)が図4に示す第3エリア内にある場合には、DDmin=Wd、DDmax=Ddmaxとなる。したがって、Ddmax≦RA・Wd+RBより、この場合の第2分配割合WRsv2の最小値WRsvcは次式(27c)で与えられる。
  WRsva=RA/(RA-1)+(RB-V)/{(RA-1)V(1-S)}…(27a)
  WRsvb=WBR・RA/(1+WBR・RA)+WBR・RB/{(1+WBR・RA)V(1-S)}…(27b)
  WRsvc=WBR(V-RB)/{(WBR+RA)V(1-S)}    …(27c)
When (S, WRs1) is in the first area shown in FIG. 4, DDmin = Ddmin and DDmax = Ddmax. Therefore, from Ddmax ≦ RA · Ddmin + RB, the minimum value WRsva of the second distribution ratio WRsv2 in this case is given by the following expression (27a). When (S, WRs1) is in the second area shown in FIG. 4, DDmin = Ddmin and DDmax = Wd. Therefore, from Wd ≦ RA · Ddmin + RB, the maximum value WRsvb of the second distribution ratio WRsv2 in this case is given by the following equation (27b). When (S, WRs1) is in the third area shown in FIG. 4, DDmin = Wd and DDmax = Ddmax. Therefore, from Ddmax ≦ RA · Wd + RB, the minimum value WRsvc of the second distribution ratio WRsv2 in this case is given by the following equation (27c).
WRsva = RA / (RA-1) + (RB-V) / {(RA-1) V (1-S)} (27a)
WRsvb = WBR.RA / (1 + WBR.RA) + WBR.RB / {(1 + WBR.RA) V (1-S)} (27b)
WRsvc = WBR (V-RB) / {(WBR + RA) V (1-S)} (27 c)
 第2分配割合WRsv2を求めるときには、(S,WRs1)が図4に示す第1エリア内にある場合、第2分配割合WRsv2を式(27a)に示す値WRsva以上にする。(S,WRs1)が図4に示す第2エリア内にある場合には、第2分配割合WRsv2を式(27b)に示す値WRsvb以下にする。(S,WRs1)が図4に示す第3エリア内にある場合には、第2分配割合WRsv2を式(27c)に示す値WRsvc以上にする。第2分配割合WRsv2が0≦WRsv2≦1の範囲内の値を取ることを考慮して、第2分配割合WRsv2を次式(28)を満たすように決定する。
  max(0, WRsva, WRsvc)≦WRsv2≦min(1, WRsvb)  …(28)
When the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is obtained, if (S, WRs1) is in the first area shown in FIG. 4, the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is set to the value WRsva or more shown in the equation (27a). When (S, WRs1) is in the second area shown in FIG. 4, the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is set to the value WRsvb or less shown in the equation (27b). If (S, WRs1) is in the third area shown in FIG. 4, the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is set to the value WRsvc or more shown in the equation (27c). Considering that the second distribution ratio WRsv2 takes a value in the range of 0 ≦ WRsv2 ≦ 1, the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is determined to satisfy the following equation (28).
max (0, WRsva, WRsvc) WR WRsv 2 min min (1, WRsvb) (28)
 図12は、第2分配割合WRsv2を求める関数の決定方法を説明するための図である。図12において実線で示す曲線は、S=0.5のときの第2分配割合WRsv2を示している。ここでは、RA=0.25、RB=0.75、WBR=0.5、WRX=0.75に設定されている。分配割合/係数演算部13は、式(8a)~(8c)に従い第1分配割合WRs1を求め、式(21)に従い係数Ksを求める。 FIG. 12 is a diagram for describing a method of determining a function for obtaining the second distribution ratio WRsv2. A curve indicated by a solid line in FIG. 12 indicates the second distribution ratio WRsv2 when S = 0.5. Here, RA = 0.25, RB = 0.75, WBR = 0.5, and WRX = 0.75. The distribution ratio / coefficient calculation unit 13 calculates the first distribution ratio WRs1 according to the equations (8a) to (8c), and calculates the coefficient Ks according to the equation (21).
 図12において太い破線で囲まれた部分は、式(28)を満たす調整明度(増幅圧縮処理後の明度)Vと第2分配割合WRsv2の範囲を示す。第2分配割合WRsv2を求める関数は、関数のグラフが図12に示す太い破線で囲まれた範囲内にあるように決定される。 A portion surrounded by a thick broken line in FIG. 12 indicates the range of the adjusted brightness (brightness after amplification and compression processing) V and the second distribution ratio WRsv2 that satisfy Expression (28). The function for obtaining the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is determined such that the graph of the function is in the range surrounded by the thick broken line shown in FIG.
 例えば、係数Ksが所定値Tsv未満のときに第2分配割合WRsv2を求める関数を、V=0のときに最大値WRZを取り、V=Ksのときに値WRs1を取る2次関数とする。また、係数Ksが所定値Tsv以上のときに第2分配割合WRsv2を求める関数を、V<TsvではV=0のときに最大値WRZを取る2次関数とし、V≧TsvではWRsv2=A/V+Bと表現でき、かつ、V=Ksのときに値WRs1を取る分数関数とする(ただし、A=WBR・RB/{(1+WBR/RA)(1-S)}である)。V=Tsvのときに2個の関数のグラフが接するように2個の関数を決定することにより、次式(29)、(30a)~(30c)が導かれる(ただし、WRZ≦WRs1のときWRsv2=WRs1とする)。
  Tsv=3・Ks・WBRb/[2{Ks(1-S)(WRZ-WRs1)+WBRb}]…(29)
 a)Ks≧TsvかつV≧Tsvのとき
    WRsv2=WRs1+WBRb(Ks-V)/{Ks(1-S)V}…(30a)
 b)Ks≧TsvかつV<Tsvのとき
    WRsv2=WRZ-WBRb・V2/{2(1-S)Tsv3} …(30b)
 c)Ks<Tsvのとき
    WRsv2=WRZ-(WRZ-WRs1)V2/Ks2     …(30c)
ただし、式(29)と(30a)~(30c)において、WBRb=WBR・RB/(1+WBR・RA)、V=Dmax・Ksである。パラメータWRZはWRs≦WRZ≦1の範囲内の値を取る。Vは調整明度(増幅圧縮処理後の明度)である。
For example, a function for obtaining the second distribution ratio WRsv2 when the coefficient Ks is less than the predetermined value Tsv is a quadratic function that takes the maximum value WRZ when V = 0 and takes the value WRs1 when V = Ks. Further, a function for obtaining the second distribution ratio WRsv2 when the coefficient Ks is equal to or more than the predetermined value Tsv is a quadratic function that takes the maximum value WRZ when V <Tsv and V = 0. WRsv2 = A / when V ≧ Tsv It can be expressed as V + B, and is a fraction function taking the value WRs1 when V = Ks (however, A = WBR · RB / {(1 + WBR / RA) (1-S)}). The following equations (29) and (30a) to (30c) can be derived by determining two functions so that the graphs of two functions are in contact when V = Tsv (where WRZ ≦ WRs1) WRsv2 = WRs1).
Tsv = 3 · Ks · WBRb / [2 {Ks (1-S) (WRZ−WRs1) + WBRb}] (29)
a) When Ks ≧ Tsv and V ≧ Tsv WRsv2 = WRs1 + WBRb (Ks−V) / {Ks (1-S) V} (30a)
b) When Ks ≧ Tsv and V <Tsv WRsv2 = WRZ−WBRb · V 2 / {2 (1-S) Tsv 3 } (30b)
c) Ks <when Tsv WRsv2 = WRZ- (WRZ-WRs1 ) V 2 / Ks 2 ... (30c)
However, in the equations (29) and (30a) to (30c), WBRb = WBR · RB / (1 + WBR · RA), and V = Dmax · Ks. The parameter WRZ takes a value within the range of WRs ≦ WRZ ≦ 1. V is adjusted brightness (brightness after amplification and compression processing).
 図12に示すように、第2分配割合WRsv2は、調整明度Vが小さいほど大きい。このため、第2分配割合WRsv2を白サブフレームへの分配割合WRsとする第2例では、分配割合/係数演算部13は、調整明度Vが小さいほど大きい分配割合WRsを求める。したがって、調整明度Vが小さいときに、色割れ低減効果を大きくすることができる。また、画素26の応答速度が遅いほどパラメータWRZを第1分配割合WRs1に近い値に設定し、画素26の応答速度が速いほどパラメータWRZを1に近い値に設定する。これにより、画素26の応答速度に応じて好適な分配割合WRsを求め、色割れを抑制することができる。ただし本変形例では、色ずれが人間の視覚上の許容範囲内となるように分配割合WRsを50%近傍の値(より一般的にはWBR/(1+WBR)近傍の値)とするために、図12より、パラメータWRZが例えば第1分配割合WRs1の近傍の所定値に設定される。 As shown in FIG. 12, the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is larger as the adjustment brightness V is smaller. Therefore, in the second example in which the second distribution ratio WRsv2 is set to the distribution ratio WRs to the white subframe, the distribution ratio / coefficient calculating unit 13 obtains a larger distribution ratio WRs as the adjustment brightness V decreases. Therefore, when the adjustment brightness V is small, the color break reduction effect can be increased. The parameter WRZ is set to a value closer to the first distribution ratio WRs1 as the response speed of the pixel 26 is slower, and the parameter WRZ is set to a value closer to 1 as the response speed of the pixel 26 is faster. As a result, it is possible to obtain a suitable distribution ratio WRs according to the response speed of the pixel 26, and to suppress color breakup. However, in the present modification, in order to set the distribution ratio WRs to a value near 50% (more generally, a value near WBR / (1 + WBR)) so that the color shift is within the visual tolerance of human beings, From FIG. 12, the parameter WRZ is set to a predetermined value near the first distribution ratio WRs1, for example.
<1.9 第1の実施形態における他の構成等>
 本実施形態によれば、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおける赤色光源(R-LED)の点灯時間が白サブフレーム期間Twにおける発光制御基準時点tecrからその終点t4までの時間(後半期間相当の時間すなわち従来の最大光源点灯時間と見なせる時間Ton)よりも長くなるので、白バランス保持の観点から、その増分に応じて、後続サブフレーム期間としての青サブフレーム期間Tbにおける光源27bの点灯時間を長くするするのが好ましい。本実施形態では、上記のように青サブフレーム期間Tbにおいて、その後半期間(tecr~t5)のみならず前半期間(t4~tecr)においても光源27b(B-LED)は点灯状態となっており(図9(A)参照)、この白バランス保持の観点からの構成が既に含まれている。
<1.9 Other Configurations and the Like in the First Embodiment>
According to the present embodiment, the lighting time of the red light source (R-LED) in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period is the time from the light emission control reference time point tecr in the white subframe period Tw to the end point t4 Since the time corresponding to the second half period, ie, the time Ton that can be regarded as the conventional maximum light source lighting time, is longer, the light source 27b in the blue subframe period Tb as the subsequent subframe period is It is preferable to increase the lighting time of In the present embodiment, as described above, the light source 27b (B-LED) is lit in the blue subframe period Tb, not only in the second half period (tecr to t5) but also in the first half period (t4 to tecr). The configuration from the viewpoint of maintaining the white balance is already included (see FIG. 9A).
 また、上記のように白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて赤色光源27r(R-LED)の点灯時間が長くなるとともに青サブフレーム期間Tbにおいて青色光源27b(B-LED)の点灯時間が長くなるので、白バランス保持の観点から、これらの増分に応じて、赤および青以外の原色の光源すなわち緑色光源27g(G-LED)の各サブフレーム期間における点灯時間も長くするのが好ましい。このような構成によれば、各光源27r,27g,27bを駆動するための光源制御信号CswX(X=R,G,B)のデューティ比を制御するだけで、白バランスを保持しつつ、彩度低下および色相ずれを抑えて色再現範囲を拡張し、全表示色輝度を向上させることができる。 Further, as described above, the lighting time of the red light source 27r (R-LED) is longer in the white subframe period Tw and the lighting time of the blue light source 27b (B-LED) is longer in the blue subframe period Tb. From the viewpoint of maintaining balance, it is preferable to increase the lighting time in each sub-frame period of the light source of primary colors other than red and blue, that is, the green light source 27g (G-LED) according to these increments. According to such a configuration, the white balance is maintained only by controlling the duty ratio of the light source control signal CswX (X = R, G, B) for driving each of the light sources 27r, 27g, 27b. The color reproduction range can be expanded by suppressing the reduction in color and the hue shift, and the all display color luminance can be improved.
 なお、青サブフレーム期間Tbから緑サブフレーム期間Tgに切り替わる時に液晶応答がディケイ応答となるかライズ応答となるかは入力画像データD1に依存する。このため、緑サブフレーム期間Tgでは、白サブフレーム期間Twおよび青サブフレーム期間Tbとは異なり、前半期間において(発光制御基準時点tecr以前において)光源27g(G-LED)が点灯しないように構成されている。したがって、既述のように本実施形態では、先行サブフレーム期間および後続サブフレーム期間以外の原色サブフレーム期間である緑サブフレーム期間Tgにおいて発光制御基準時点tecr以前において(液晶の光学応答特性に基づき非点灯とすべき期間において)光源27gを点灯させることなく白バランスを確保できるように、各光源(各LED)にその点灯時に流すべき電流が予め設定されている(図9(B)参照)。ただし、各光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)についての当該電流設定を従来とおりとしても白バランスからのずれが人間の視覚上の許容範囲内であれば、このような図9(B)に示す各光源の点灯時間に応じた電流設定は必ずしも必要ではない。 Whether the liquid crystal response becomes a decay response or a rise response when switching from the blue subframe period Tb to the green subframe period Tg depends on the input image data D1. Therefore, in the green subframe period Tg, unlike the white subframe period Tw and the blue subframe period Tb, the light source 27g (G-LED) is not lit in the first half period (before the light emission control reference time point tecr). It is done. Therefore, as described above, in the present embodiment, before the light emission control reference time point tecr in the green subframe period Tg which is the primary color subframe period other than the preceding subframe period and the subsequent subframe period (based on the optical response characteristic of liquid crystal Each light source (each LED) is preset with a current to be supplied at the time of lighting so that white balance can be secured without lighting the light source 27g (during a period in which light should not be turned on) (see FIG. 9B) . However, even if the current setting for each light source (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) is as in the past, if the deviation from the white balance is within the visual range of human vision, such FIG. The current setting corresponding to the lighting time of each light source shown in (B) is not necessarily required.
 図13は、本実施形態における混色色相のずれの補償方法を説明するための図であり、図13における円はカラーホイールを示している。このカラーホイールでは、その円周方向に色相が変化し、“R”,“G”,“B”は赤、緑、青に相当する角度位置をそれぞれ示しており、“C”,“M”,“Y”はシアン、マゼンタ、イエロー(黄)に相当する角度位置をそれぞれ示している。また、このカラーホイールでは、その半径方向に彩度が変化し、その中心は彩度=0(無彩色)に対応する。図13では、図10に示したケース(1)~(9)の目標色のカラーホイールにおける位置が“(1)”~“(9)”で示されている。 FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the method of compensating for the deviation of the mixed color hue in the present embodiment, and the circle in FIG. 13 shows the color wheel. In this color wheel, the hue changes in the circumferential direction, and "R", "G" and "B" indicate angular positions corresponding to red, green and blue, respectively, and "C" and "M" , “Y” indicate angular positions corresponding to cyan, magenta and yellow, respectively. Further, in this color wheel, the saturation changes in the radial direction, and the center thereof corresponds to saturation = 0 (achromatic). In FIG. 13, the positions in the color wheel of the target color of the cases (1) to (9) shown in FIG. 10 are indicated by “(1)” to “(9)”.
 本実施形態では、既述のように彩度低下や色相ずれを抑えつつ各色の輝度を向上させることができるが、図10における表示動作を示す波形図(太い点線の波形)からわかるように、液晶の応答特性に起因して、ケース(1)~(9)の目標色から彩度や色相に若干のずれが生じる。図13において“(1)”~“(9)”の近傍に付された矢印は、これらのずれの方向、すなわち、ケース(1)~(9)の各目標色に対応する表示色が当該目標色の色度点から移動する方向を示している。図13では、ケース(2),(4),(7)については矢印が円周方向を向いており、これは、表示色としての混色色相が目標色の色相からずれて色バランスが崩れることを意味する(図10におけるケース(2),(4),(7)ついての表示動作を示す波形図参照)。そこで、このような色相ずれが補償されるように各光源27r、27g、27b(R-LED,G-LED,B-LED)のスペクトルを予め設定しておくのが好ましい。ただし、このようなLEDスペクトルの設定によって上記色相ずれを補償しようとすると、白バランスを保持できなくなる可能性がある。しかし、この場合には、原色サブフレーム期間(RGB-SF)および白色サブフレーム期間(W-SF)における各光源27r、27g、27bのデューティ比(1フレーム期間における点灯時間の割合)を調整することで白バランスを保持することができる。上記ケース(2)(4)(7)以外のケースについては、表示色において彩度のずれが生じる場合(図13において半径方向の矢印が示される場合)があるが、問題となるような色相ずれは生じない。なお、図13において矢印で示すような色度点の移動が人間の視覚上の許容範囲内であれば、各光源につきこのような色相ずれの補償のためのスペクトル設定を行うことは必ずしも必要ではない。 In the present embodiment, as described above, the luminance of each color can be improved while suppressing the saturation decrease and the hue shift, but as can be seen from the waveform diagram (waveform of thick dotted line) showing the display operation in FIG. Due to the response characteristics of the liquid crystal, a slight shift occurs in saturation and hue from the target colors of cases (1) to (9). Arrows attached in the vicinity of “(1)” to “(9)” in FIG. 13 indicate the directions of these deviations, that is, the display colors corresponding to the respective target colors of cases (1) to (9) are relevant. It indicates the direction of movement from the chromaticity point of the target color. In FIG. 13, the arrows in the cases (2), (4), and (7) point in the circumferential direction, which means that the mixed hue as the display color deviates from the hue of the target color and the color balance is lost. (See the waveform diagram showing the display operation for cases (2), (4) and (7) in FIG. 10). Therefore, it is preferable to set in advance the spectrum of each of the light sources 27r, 27g, 27b (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) so that such hue shift is compensated. However, when trying to compensate for the above-mentioned hue shift by setting of such an LED spectrum, there is a possibility that the white balance can not be maintained. However, in this case, the duty ratio (ratio of lighting time in one frame period) of each of the light sources 27r, 27g, 27b in the primary color subframe period (RGB-SF) and the white subframe period (W-SF) is adjusted. Can maintain the white balance. In the cases other than the above cases (2), (4) and (7), there may be a case where a shift in saturation occurs in the display color (when an arrow in the radial direction is shown in FIG. 13). There is no deviation. If the movement of the chromaticity point as shown by the arrow in FIG. 13 is within the visual tolerance of human beings, it is not always necessary to perform spectrum setting for compensation of such hue shift for each light source. Absent.
 上記第1の実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間(白サブフレーム期間Tw)の直前および直後のサブフレーム期間(先行および後続サブフレーム期間)を除く原色サブフレーム期間である緑サブフレーム期間Tgでは、発光制御基準時点tecrで光源が点灯を開始する。これは、液晶の応答の過渡状態の終了後に光源が点灯状態になることを意味する。一方、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twおよび後続サブフレーム期間としての青サブフレーム期間Tbでは、それぞれの発光制御基準時点tecr以前(従来は液晶の応答特性の観点から発光を抑制すべき時間内)に光源の点灯が開始され、この点が上記第1の実施形態の特徴となっている。 In the first embodiment, in the green sub-frame period Tg which is a primary color sub-frame period other than the sub-frame periods (preceding and subsequent sub-frame periods) immediately before and after the common color sub-frame period (white sub-frame period Tw). The light source starts to light at the light emission control reference time point tecr. This means that the light source turns on after the end of the transient state of the liquid crystal response. On the other hand, in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period and the blue subframe period Tb as the subsequent subframe period, the light emission control reference time point tecr (before conventionally, light emission is suppressed from the viewpoint of liquid crystal response characteristics) The lighting of the light source is started within the expected time, which is the feature of the first embodiment.
 なお、各サブフレーム期間において、その発光制御基準時点tecrから当該サブフレームの期間の終点までが最大光源点灯時間となるように、液晶の応答特性の観点から発光を抑制すべき時間の終了時点を発光制御基準時点tecrとして設定するのが好ましいが、色ずれや平均発光量の低下が人間の視覚上の許容範囲内であれば、このような設定と異なっていてもよい。 In each subframe period, the end time of the light emission suppression period from the viewpoint of the response characteristic of the liquid crystal is set so that the maximum light source lighting time is from the light emission control reference time point tecr to the end point of the subframe period. Although it is preferable to set as the light emission control reference time point tecr, it may be different from such a setting if the color shift and the decrease of the average light emission amount are within the visual range of human vision.
<1.10 第1の実施形態の第1変形例>
 上記第1の実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twの後続サブフレーム期間である青サブフレーム期間Tbにおいて、光源27b(B-LED)が発光制御基準時点tecrよりも前に点灯を開始する(後半期間のみならず前半期間も点灯状態である)が(図7、図9参照)、これに代えて、青サブフレーム期間Tbにおいて発光制御基準時点tecrに光源27b(B-LED)が点灯を開始する(後半期間のみで点灯状態となる)ようにしてもよい。以下、このような構成の画像表示装置を第1の実施形態の第1変形例として説明する。
<1.10 First Modification of First Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the light source 27b (B-LED) is before the light emission control reference time point tecr in the blue subframe period Tb which is a subsequent subframe period of the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period. Lighting (not only in the second half period but also in the first half period) (see FIGS. 7 and 9), but instead, at the light emission control reference time point tecr in the blue subframe period Tb, the light source 27b (B -LED) may start lighting (it will be in the lighting state only in the second half period). Hereinafter, an image display apparatus having such a configuration will be described as a first modified example of the first embodiment.
 本変形例では、上記のように青サブフレーム期間Tbにおいて発光制御基準時点tecrに光源が点灯を開始するが、他の構成は上記第1の実施形態と同様である。このため、本変形例に係る画像表示装置の構成のうち上記第1の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成と同一または対応する部分には同一の参照符号を付し、詳しい説明を省略する(図1、図3、図5参照)。 In the present modification, as described above, the light source starts lighting at the light emission control reference time point tecr in the blue sub-frame period Tb, but the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present modification, the same reference numerals as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first embodiment denote the same or corresponding parts. 1, 3 and 5).
 図15(A)は、本変形例における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図15(B)は、本変形例における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間および発光量を示す図である。また図14(A)は、本変形例に対応する従来例(以下「第2従来例」という)における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図14(B)は、第2従来例における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間を示す図である。この第2従来例は、1フレーム期間Tfr(TOTAL)における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯時間の割合が本変形例の当該割合に合わせて1:2/3:2/3とされている点で、当該割合が1:2/3:1である第1従来例と相違するが、他の点は第1従来例と同様である。 FIG. 15A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification, and FIG. 15B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification). -LED) It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity. FIG. 14 (A) is a timing chart and a waveform diagram for describing a display operation in a conventional example (hereinafter referred to as “second conventional example”) corresponding to the present modification, and FIG. 14 (B) FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the lighting time of each of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in the conventional example 2; In this second conventional example, the ratio of the lighting time of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in one frame period Tfr (TOTAL) is 1: 2 in proportion to the ratio of this modification. The third embodiment differs from the first conventional example in which the ratio is 1: 2/3: 1 in that it is 3: 2/3, but the other points are the same as the first conventional example.
 本変形例では、図15(A)に示すように、青サブフレーム期間Tbにおいて後半期間(tecr~t5)でのみ光源27b(B-LED)が点灯状態となることから、各光源27r、27g,27b(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の発光パターンが上記第1の実施形態の発光パターンとは若干相違する。しかし、表示動作(液晶応答およびLED動作)は概ね上記第1の実施形態と同様であり、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twでは、先行サブフレーム期間Trに対応する原色の光源27r(R-LED)は発光制御基準時点tecrよりも前に点灯を開始する(白サブフレーム期間Twの後半期間のみならず前半期間においても点灯状態である)(図9(A)、図15(A)参照)。 In this modification, as shown in FIG. 15A, since the light source 27b (B-LED) is turned on only in the second half period (tecr to t5) in the blue subframe period Tb, each light source 27r, 27g , 27b (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are slightly different from the light emission pattern of the first embodiment. However, the display operation (liquid crystal response and LED operation) is substantially the same as in the first embodiment, and in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period, the light source 27r of the primary color corresponding to the preceding subframe period Tr. (R-LED) starts to light up before the light emission control reference time point tecr (lights up not only in the second half period of the white subframe period Tw but also in the first half period) (FIG. 9A, FIG. See A).
 本変形例では、図15(B)に示すように、白バランスをとるための3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯時間の割合が1.5:1:1となるように、3原色光源のそれぞれの点灯時における電流値が予め設定されている。このような電流設定によれば、図15(B)における棒グラフからわかるように、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいてバックライト25の発光色が白色から赤方向に若干シフトしている。 In this modification, as shown in FIG. 15B, the ratio of the lighting time of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) for achieving white balance is 1.5: 1: 1. The current values at the time of lighting each of the three primary color light sources are set in advance so that According to such current setting, as understood from the bar graph in FIG. 15B, the emission color of the backlight 25 is slightly shifted from white to red in the white subframe period Tw.
 上記のような本変形例によれば、上記第1の実施形態に比べると、白サブフレーム期間Twにおける発光色が異なることから色割れ低減の効果に違いが生じるが、概ね上記第1の実施形態と同様の効果が得られる。 According to the above modification, compared to the first embodiment, since the emission color in the white subframe period Tw is different, the effect of reducing the color breakup is different. The same effect as the form can be obtained.
<1.11 第1の実施形態の第2変形例>
 上記第1の実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて、先行サブフレーム期間に対応する赤色光源27r(R-LED)が発光制御基準時点tecrよりも前に点灯を開始する(後半期間のみならず前半期間も点灯状態である)が(図7、図9参照)、これに代えて、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて、先行サブフレーム期間Trに対応する赤色光源27r(R-LED)が発光制御基準時点tecrに点灯を開始する(後半期間のみで点灯状態となる)ようにしてもよい。以下、このような構成の画像表示装置を第1の実施形態の第2変形例として説明する。
<1.11 Second Modification of First Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period, the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period starts lighting before the light emission control reference time point tecr. (Refer to FIG. 7 and FIG. 9), but instead, in the white subframe period Tw, the red light source 27r corresponding to the preceding subframe period Tr (R -The LED) may start lighting at the light emission control reference time point tecr (it will be in the lighting state only in the second half period). Hereinafter, an image display apparatus having such a configuration will be described as a second modification of the first embodiment.
 本変形例では、上記のように白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて発光制御基準時点tecrに赤色光源27rが点灯を開始するが、他の構成は上記第1の実施形態と同様である。このため、本変形例に係る画像表示装置の構成のうち上記第1の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成と同一または対応する部分には同一の参照符号を付し、詳しい説明を省略する(図1、図3、図5参照)。 In the present modification, as described above, the red light source 27r starts lighting at the light emission control reference time point tecr in the white subframe period Tw, but the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present modification, the same reference numerals as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first embodiment denote the same or corresponding parts. 1, 3 and 5).
 図17(A)は、本変形例における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図17(B)は、本変形例における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間および発光量を示す図である。また図16(A)は、本変形例に対応する従来例(以下「第3従来例」という)における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図16(B)は、第3従来例における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間を示す図である。この第3従来例は、1フレーム期間Tfr(TOTAL)における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯時間の割合が本変形例の当該割合に合わせて2/3:2/3:1とされている点で第1従来例と相違するが、他の点は第1従来例と同様である。 FIG. 17A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification, and FIG. 17B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification). -LED) It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity. FIG. 16 (A) is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in the conventional example (hereinafter referred to as “third prior art”) corresponding to the present modification, and FIG. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the lighting time of each of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in the conventional example 3; In this third conventional example, the ratio of the lighting time of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in one frame period Tfr (TOTAL) is 2/3 in accordance with the ratio of this modified example: The second conventional example differs from the first conventional example in that it is 2/3: 1, but the other points are the same as the first conventional example.
 本変形例では、図17(A)に示すように、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて赤色光源27r(R-LED)が後半期間(tecr~t4)でのみ点灯状態となることから、各光源27r、27g,27b(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の発光パターンが上記第1の実施形態の発光パターンとは若干相違する。しかし、表示動作(液晶応答およびLED動作)は概ね上記第1の実施形態と同様であり、後続サブフレーム期間(白サブフレーム期間Twの直後のサブフレーム期間)としての青サブフレーム期間Tbでは、発光制御基準時点tecrよりも前に光源27b(B-LED)が点灯を開始する(青サブフレーム期間Tbの後半期間のみならず前半期間においても点灯状態である)(図9(A)、図17(A)参照)。 In this modification, as shown in FIG. 17A, since the red light source 27r (R-LED) is turned on only in the second half period (tecr to t4) in the white subframe period Tw, each light source 27r, The light emission pattern of 27 g and 27 b (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) is slightly different from the light emission pattern of the first embodiment. However, the display operation (liquid crystal response and LED operation) is substantially the same as in the first embodiment, and in the blue subframe period Tb as the subsequent subframe period (subframe period immediately after the white subframe period Tw), The light source 27b (B-LED) starts to light up before the light emission control reference time point tecr (the light is on in the first half period as well as the second half period of the blue subframe period Tb) (FIG. 9A, FIG. 17 (A)).
 本変形例では、図17(B)に示すように、白バランスをとるための3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯時間の割合が1:1:1.5となるように、3原色光源のそれぞれの点灯時における電流値が予め設定されている。このような電流設定によれば、図17(B)における棒グラフからわかるように、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいてバックライト25の発光色が白色から黄色方向に若干シフトしている。 In this modification, as shown in FIG. 17B, the ratio of the lighting time of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) for achieving white balance is 1: 1: 1.5. The current values at the time of lighting each of the three primary color light sources are set in advance so that According to such current setting, as understood from the bar graph in FIG. 17B, the emission color of the backlight 25 is slightly shifted from white to yellow in the white subframe period Tw.
 上記のような本変形例によれば、上記第1の実施形態に比べると、白サブフレーム期間Twにおける発光色が異なることから色割れ低減の効果に違いが生じるが、概ね上記第1の実施形態と同様の効果が得られる。 According to the above modification, compared to the first embodiment, since the emission color in the white subframe period Tw is different, the effect of reducing the color breakup is different. The same effect as the form can be obtained.
<2.第2の実施形態>
 次に、第2の実施形態に係る画像表示装置について説明する。
 図19(A)は、本実施形態における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図19(B)は、本実施形態における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間および発光量を示す図である。また図18(A)は、本実施形態に対応する従来例における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図19(B)は、この従来例における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間を示す図である。この従来例は、図8に示した第1従来例と同じものである。
<2. Second embodiment>
Next, an image display apparatus according to the second embodiment will be described.
FIG. 19A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in the present embodiment, and FIG. 19B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in the present embodiment). -LED) It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity. FIG. 18A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in the conventional example corresponding to the present embodiment, and FIG. 19B is a three primary color light source (R-LED in this conventional example). , G-LED, B-LED) is a diagram showing the lighting time of each. This prior art example is the same as the first prior art example shown in FIG.
 上記第1の実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて、先行サブフレーム期間に対応する赤色光源27r(R-LED)が発光制御基準時点tecrよりも前に点灯を開始する(後半期間のみならず前半期間も点灯状態である)(図7、図9参照)。これに対し本実施形態では、図19(A)に示すように、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて、先行サブフレーム期間Trに対応する赤色光源27r(R-LED)が発光制御基準時点tecrに点灯を開始する(後半期間のみで点灯状態となる)。 In the first embodiment, in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period, the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period starts lighting before the light emission control reference time point tecr. (Not only in the second half period but also in the first half period) (see FIGS. 7 and 9). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19A, in the white subframe period Tw, the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period Tr lights up at the light emission control reference time point tecr. Start (become lit only in the second half period).
 また上記第1の実施形態では、白サブフレーム期間Twにおける赤色光源(R-LED)の点灯時間は、白サブフレーム期間Twにおける発光制御基準時点tecrからその終点t4までの時間(白サブフレーム期間Twでの赤色光源以外の他の光源(緑色光源もしくは青色光源)の点灯時間の長さ、または、従来例における白サブフレーム期間Twでの赤色光源の点灯時間の長さ)よりも長く、これらの時間差に基づき、後続サブフレーム期間Tbでの青色光源27b(B-LED)の点灯時間は、白サブフレーム期間Twにおける赤色光源の点灯時間に応じた長さとなっている(図8、図9参照)。さらに上記第1の実施形態では、上記時間差に基づき、先行および後続サブフレーム期間以外の原色サブフレーム期間Tgに対応する緑色光源27g(G-LED)の各サブフレーム期間での点灯時間は、白サブフレーム期間Twにおける赤色光源27rの点灯時間に応じた長さとなっている(図8、図9参照)。これに対し本実施形態では、青色光源27b(B-LED)および緑色光源27g(G-LED)の点灯時間につき上記のような増大はなく、これらの点灯時間は従来例と同様である(図18、図19参照)。 In the first embodiment, the lighting time of the red light source (R-LED) in the white subframe period Tw is the time from the light emission control reference time point tecr in the white subframe period Tw to the end point t4 (white subframe period Length of lighting time of other light source (green light source or blue light source) other than red light source at Tw, or length of lighting time of red light source at white subframe period Tw in the conventional example), The lighting time of the blue light source 27b (B-LED) in the subsequent subframe period Tb has a length corresponding to the lighting time of the red light source in the white subframe period Tw (FIGS. 8 and 9). reference). Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the lighting time in each subframe period of the green light source 27g (G-LED) corresponding to the primary color subframe period Tg other than the preceding and succeeding subframe periods is white based on the time difference. The length corresponds to the lighting time of the red light source 27r in the subframe period Tw (see FIGS. 8 and 9). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lighting time of the blue light source 27b (B-LED) and the green light source 27g (G-LED) does not increase as described above, and the lighting time of these is similar to that of the conventional example (see FIG. 18, see FIG. 19).
 本実施形態におけるバックライト駆動回路23はバックライト25の3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)が上記のように動作するように構成されているが、本実施形態における他の構成は上記第1の実施形態と同様である。このため、本実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成のうち上記第1の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成と同一または対応する部分には同一の参照符号を付し、詳しい説明を省略する(図1、図3、図5参照)。 The backlight drive circuit 23 in the present embodiment is configured such that the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 operate as described above, but other components in the present embodiment The configuration of is the same as that of the first embodiment. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present embodiment, the same reference numerals as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first embodiment denote the same or corresponding parts. 1, 3 and 5).
 図19(B)に示すように本実施形態では、白バランスをとるための1フレーム期間Tfr(TOTAL)での3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯時間の割合が1:2/3:1となるように、3原色光源のそれぞれの点灯時における電流値が予め設定されている。このような電流設定によれば、図19(B)における棒グラフからわかるように、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいてバックライト25の発光色が白色から赤方向に若干シフトしている。 As shown in FIG. 19B, in this embodiment, the ratio of the lighting time of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in one frame period Tfr (TOTAL) for achieving white balance The current value at the time of lighting of each of the three primary color light sources is preset so that 1: 2/3: 1. According to such current setting, as understood from the bar graph in FIG. 19B, the emission color of the backlight 25 is slightly shifted from white to red in the white subframe period Tw.
 図19(A)に示すように本実施形態では、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて赤色光源27r(R-LED)が後半期間(tecr~t4)でのみ点灯状態となり、1フレーム期間Tfrでの緑色光源(G-LED)の点灯時間は増大せず第1従来例と同様である(図18参照)。また、後続サブフレーム期間である青サブフレーム期間Tbでは、光源27b(B-LED)はその青サブフレーム期間Tbの始点で非点灯であるが、発光制御基準時点tecrよりも早い時刻t41に点灯を開始し(t4<t41<tecr)、この時刻t41からその青サブフレーム期間Tbの終点まで点灯状態となる。ただし、1フレーム期間Tfrでの青色光源(B-LED)の点灯時間は増大せず第1従来例と同様である(図18参照)。 As shown in FIG. 19A, in the present embodiment, the red light source 27r (R-LED) is turned on only in the second half period (tecr to t4) in the white subframe period Tw, and the green light source in one frame period Tfr. The lighting time of (G-LED) does not increase and is the same as the first conventional example (see FIG. 18). Further, in the blue subframe period Tb which is a subsequent subframe period, the light source 27b (B-LED) is not lit at the start point of the blue subframe period Tb, but is lit at time t41 earlier than the light emission control reference time point tecr. Is started (t4 <t41 <tecr), and the light is turned on from this time t41 to the end point of the blue subframe period Tb. However, the lighting time of the blue light source (B-LED) in one frame period Tfr does not increase and is the same as in the first conventional example (see FIG. 18).
 また、図19(A)に示すように本実施形態では、緑色光源27g(G-LED)は、緑サブフレーム期間Tgにおける点灯期間(tecr~t2)では連続的に駆動され、白サブフレーム期間Twにおける点灯期間(tecr~t4)ではパルス幅変調方式により駆動される。青色光源27b(B-LED)も、青サブフレーム期間Tbにおける点灯期間(t41~t5)では連続的に駆動され、白サブフレーム期間Twにおける点灯期間(tecr~t4)ではパルス幅変調方式により駆動される。このため、緑色光源27g(G-LED)については、緑サブフレーム期間Tgで点灯している時間が白サブフレーム期間Twで点灯している時間よりも長く、青色光源27b(B-LED)についても、青サブフレーム期間Tbで点灯している時間が白サブフレーム期間Twで点灯している時間よりも長い。すなわち本実施形態では、先行サブフレーム期間(赤サブフレーム期間Tr)に対応する赤色光源27r(R-LED)以外の光源27xの対応原色サブフレーム期間Txでの点灯時間は、共通色サブフレーム期間(白サブフレーム期間Tw)での当該光源27xの点灯時間よりも長い(x=g,b)。 Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, in the present embodiment, the green light source 27g (G-LED) is continuously driven in the lighting period (tecr to t2) in the green subframe period Tg, and the white subframe period is In the lighting period (tecr to t4) at Tw, driving is performed by the pulse width modulation method. The blue light source 27b (B-LED) is also driven continuously in the lighting period (t41 to t5) in the blue subframe period Tb, and driven by the pulse width modulation method in the lighting period (tecr to t4) in the white subframe period Tw. Be done. Therefore, for the green light source 27g (G-LED), the time during which the green sub-frame period Tg is on is longer than the time during which the white sub-frame period Tw is on, and the blue light source 27b (B-LED) Also, the lighting time in the blue subframe period Tb is longer than the lighting time in the white subframe period Tw. That is, in the present embodiment, the lighting time in the corresponding primary color subframe period Tx of the light sources 27x other than the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period (red subframe period Tr) is the common color subframe period It is longer than the lighting time of the light source 27x in the (white subframe period Tw) (x = g, b).
 このような本実施形態によれば、上記第1の実施形態に比べ、白色輝度を変化させることなく単色輝度を向上させることができるので、入力画像データD1の表す画像において白色輝度が単色輝度に対して大きくなる場合に好適である。一方、各光源27r、27g,27b(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の発光パターンが上記第1の実施形態の発光パターンとは相違するものの、表示動作(液晶応答およびLED動作)は上記第1の実施形態と類似しており、基本的には上記第1の実施形態と同様の効果が得られる。 According to the present embodiment, compared to the first embodiment, the single-color luminance can be improved without changing the white luminance, so that the white luminance in the image represented by the input image data D1 is set to the single-color luminance. It is suitable when it becomes large with respect to. On the other hand, although the light emission pattern of each light source 27r, 27g, 27b (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) is different from the light emission pattern of the first embodiment, the display operation (liquid crystal response and LED operation) Is similar to that of the first embodiment, and basically the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained.
<2.1 第2の実施形態の第1変形例>
 上記第2の実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて後半期間(tecr~t4)の全体で、3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)が点灯状態となっている。ただし、緑色光源(G-LED)および青色光源(B-LED)は、1フレーム期間Tfrでの点灯時間が増大しないように当該後半期間(tecr~t4)でパルス幅変調方式により駆動される(図19(A)参照)。
<2.1 First Modification of Second Embodiment>
In the second embodiment, the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are lit in the entire second half period (tecr to t4) in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period. It is in the state. However, the green light source (G-LED) and the blue light source (B-LED) are driven by the pulse width modulation method in the second half period (tecr to t4) so that the lighting time in one frame period Tfr does not increase ( 19 (A)).
 これに対し本変形例では バックライト25の3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)が図20に示すように駆動される。図20(A)は、本変形例における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図20(B)は、本変形例における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間および発光量を示す図である。本変形例におけるバックライト25の駆動に関する構成以外の構成については上記第1および第2の実施形態と同様である。このため、本変形例に係る画像表示装置の構成のうち上記第1および第2の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成と同一または対応する部分には同一の参照符号を付し、詳しい説明を省略する(図1、図3、図5参照)。 On the other hand, in this modification, the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 are driven as shown in FIG. FIG. 20A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification, and FIG. 20B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification). -LED) It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity. The configuration other than the configuration relating to driving of the backlight 25 in the present modification is the same as that of the first and second embodiments. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present modification, the same or corresponding parts as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first and second embodiments are given the same reference numerals, It abbreviates (refer to Drawing 1, Drawing 3, and Drawing 5).
 図20(B)に示すように本変形例では、上記第2の実施形態と同様、1フレーム期間Tfrでの緑色光源(G-LED)の点灯時間は増大しない(図18に示す従来例と同様)。しかし、図20(A)に示すように本変形例では、上記第2の実施形態とは異なり、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて緑色光源27g(G-LED)および青色光源27b(B-LED)は、パルス幅変調方式により駆動されるのではなく、その白サブフレーム期間Twの終点t4に接する所定期間において連続的に駆動される。すなわち、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて緑色光源27gおよび青色光源27bは、発光制御基準時点tecrよりも後の時刻t31に点灯を開始し、時刻t31からその白サブフレーム期間Twの終点t4まで連続的な点灯状態となる。3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)についてのその他の動作は上記第2の実施形態と同様である。 As shown in FIG. 20 (B), in the present modification, the lighting time of the green light source (G-LED) in one frame period Tfr does not increase as in the second embodiment (the conventional example shown in FIG. As well). However, as shown in FIG. 20A, in this modification, unlike the second embodiment, the green light source 27g (G-LED) and the blue light source 27b (B-LED) are in the white subframe period Tw. Instead of being driven by the pulse width modulation method, the white subframe period Tw is continuously driven in a predetermined period in contact with the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw. That is, in the white sub-frame period Tw, the green light source 27g and the blue light source 27b start lighting at time t31 after the light emission control reference time point tecr, and continuously from time t31 to the end point t4 of the white sub-frame period Tw. It lights up. The other operations of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are the same as in the second embodiment.
 このような本変形例によれば、上記第2の実施形態と同様の効果を奏しつつ、単色輝度を更に向上させることができる。 According to such a modification, it is possible to further improve single-color luminance while achieving the same effect as that of the second embodiment.
<2.2 第2の実施形態の第2変形例>
 上記第2の実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて後半期間(tecr~t4)の全体で、3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)が点灯状態となっている。
<2.2 Second Modification of Second Embodiment>
In the second embodiment, the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are lit in the entire second half period (tecr to t4) in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period. It is in the state.
 これに対し本変形例では バックライト25の3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)が図21に示すように駆動される。図21(A)は、本変形例における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図21(B)は、本変形例における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間および発光量を示す図である。本変形例におけるバックライト25の駆動に関する構成以外の構成については上記第1および第2の実施形態と同様である。このため、本変形例に係る画像表示装置の構成のうち上記第1および第2の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成と同一または対応する部分には同一の参照符号を付し、詳しい説明を省略する(図1、図3、図5参照)。 On the other hand, in this modification, the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 are driven as shown in FIG. FIG. 21A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification, and FIG. 21B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification). -LED) It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity. The configuration other than the configuration relating to driving of the backlight 25 in the present modification is the same as that of the first and second embodiments. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present modification, the same or corresponding parts as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first and second embodiments are given the same reference numerals, It abbreviates (refer to Drawing 1, Drawing 3, and Drawing 5).
 図21(B)に示すように本変形例では、上記第2の実施形態と同様、1フレーム期間Tfrでの緑色光源(G-LED)の点灯時間は増大しない(図18に示す従来例と同様)。しかし、図21(A)に示すように本変形例では、上記第2の実施形態とは異なり、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて緑色光源27g(G-LED)および青色光源27b(B-LED)は、パルス幅変調方式により駆動されるのではなく、その白サブフレーム期間Twの終点t4に接する所定期間において連続的に駆動される。この点で本変形例は、上記第2の実施形態の第1変形例と同様である(図20参照)。しかし、図21(A)に示すように本変形例では、上記第2の実施形態およびその第1変形例とは異なり、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて赤色光源27r(R-LED)が点灯状態である期間が、その白サブフレーム期間Twの始点t3と終点t4にそれぞれ接する第1期間(t3~t31)と第2期間(t32~t4)に分離されている。赤色光源27rは、第1期間の終点t31から第2期間の始点t32までは非点状態となる。3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)についてのその他の動作は上記第2の実施形態と同様である。 As shown in FIG. 21B, in the present modification, as in the second embodiment, the lighting time of the green light source (G-LED) in one frame period Tfr does not increase (the conventional example shown in FIG. 18 and the prior art) As well). However, as shown in FIG. 21A, in this modification, unlike the second embodiment, the green light source 27g (G-LED) and the blue light source 27b (B-LED) are in the white subframe period Tw. Instead of being driven by the pulse width modulation method, the white subframe period Tw is continuously driven in a predetermined period in contact with the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw. In this respect, the present modification is the same as the first modification of the second embodiment (see FIG. 20). However, as shown in FIG. 21 (A), in this modification, unlike the second embodiment and the first modification, the red light source 27r (R-LED) is on in the white subframe period Tw. A certain period is divided into a first period (t3 to t31) and a second period (t32 to t4) respectively contacting the start point t3 and the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw. The red light source 27r is astigmatic from the end point t31 of the first period to the start point t32 of the second period. The other operations of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are the same as in the second embodiment.
 本変形例においては、白サブフレーム期間Twに得られる発光色のうち色割れの低減に寄与する白色が白表示における白色に対して変化しないように白サブフレーム期間Twでの赤色光源27rの点灯期間を第1期間と第2期間とに分離することができる(図21(B)下部の棒グラフ参照)。このような本変形例によれば、上記第2の実施形態と同様の効果を奏しつつ、先行サブフレーム期間である赤サブフレーム期間Trに対応する原色としての赤色の輝度(単色輝度)を更に向上させることができる。 In this modification, the lighting of the red light source 27r in the white subframe period Tw is performed so that the white color contributing to the reduction of color break in the luminescent color obtained in the white subframe period Tw does not change with respect to white in white display. The periods can be separated into a first period and a second period (see the lower bar in FIG. 21B). According to such a modification, while achieving the same effect as the second embodiment, the red luminance (monochromatic luminance) as a primary color corresponding to the red subframe period Tr which is the preceding subframe period is further added. It can be improved.
<3.第3の実施形態>
 次に、第3の実施形態に係る画像表示装置について説明する。
 図23(A)は、本実施形態における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図23(B)は、本実施形態における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間および発光量を示す図である。また図22(A)は、本実施形態に対応する従来例における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図22(B)は、この従来例における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間を示す図である。この従来例は、図8、図18に示した第1従来例と同じものである。
<3. Third embodiment>
Next, an image display apparatus according to a third embodiment will be described.
FIG. 23A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this embodiment, and FIG. 23B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this embodiment). -LED) It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity. FIG. 22 (A) is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in the conventional example corresponding to the present embodiment, and FIG. 22 (B) is a three primary color light source (R-LED in this conventional example). , G-LED, B-LED) is a diagram showing the lighting time of each. This prior art example is the same as the first prior art example shown in FIGS.
 上記第2の実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて、先行サブフレーム期間に対応する赤色光源27r(R-LED)は発光制御基準時点tecrに点灯を開始し、その白サブフレーム期間Twの始点t3から発光制御基準時点tecrまで(前半期間)は非点灯状態となっている(図19参照)。これに対し本実施形態では、図23(A)に示すように、白サブフレーム期間Twでは、先行サブフレーム期間Trに対応する赤色光源(R-LED)は、その始点t3から発光制御基準時点tecrまで(前半期間)点灯状態であり、当該発光制御基準時点tecrからその終点t4までは非点灯状態である。本実施形態におけるバックライト25の3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)についてのその他の動作は上記第2の実施形態と同様であり、1フレーム期間Tfrでの各光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯時間が増大せず従来例と同じである点も上記第2の実施形態と同様である(図22、図23参照)。また図23(B)に示すように、本実施形態においても、上記第2の実施形態と同様、白バランスをとるための1フレーム期間Tfr(TOTAL)での3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯時間の割合が1:2/3:1となるように、3原色光源のそれぞれの点灯時における電流値が予め設定されている。 In the second embodiment, in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period, the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period starts lighting at the light emission control reference time point tecr, and From the start point t3 of the white subframe period Tw to the light emission control reference time point tecr (first half period), the light is not lit (see FIG. 19). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23A, in the white subframe period Tw, the red light source (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period Tr receives the light emission control reference time from its start point t3. It is in the lighting state up to tecr (first half period), and is in the non-lighting state from the light emission control reference time point tecr to its end point t4. The other operations of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 in the present embodiment are the same as those of the second embodiment, and each light source in one frame period Tfr ( The lighting time of the R-LED, G-LED, and B-LED is the same as that of the conventional example without increasing. The second embodiment is also the same as the second embodiment (see FIGS. 22 and 23). Further, as shown in FIG. 23B, also in this embodiment, as in the second embodiment, three primary color light sources (R-LED, G) in one frame period Tfr (TOTAL) for achieving white balance. The current value at the time of lighting each of the three primary color light sources is preset so that the ratio of the lighting time of the LED and B-LED) is 1: 2/3: 1.
 本実施形態におけるバックライト駆動回路23はバックライト25の3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)が上記のように動作するよう構成されているが、本実施形態における他の構成は上記第1および第2の実施形態と同様である。このため、本実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成のうち上記第1および第2の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成と同一または対応する部分には同一の参照符号を付し、詳しい説明を省略する(図1、図3、図5参照)。 The backlight drive circuit 23 in the present embodiment is configured such that the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 operate as described above, but other light sources in the present embodiment The configuration is the same as that of the first and second embodiments. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present embodiment, the same reference numerals as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first and second embodiments denote the same or corresponding parts. It abbreviates (refer to Drawing 1, Drawing 3, and Drawing 5).
 図23(A)に示すように本実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて、先行サブフレーム期間に対応する赤色光源27r(R-LED)の点灯期間は前半期間(t3~tecr)のみであり、緑色光源27g(G-LED)および青色光源27b(B-LED)の点灯期間は後半期間(tecr~t4)のみである。このため、色割れ低減に寄与する共通色の色度点が白表示における白色からシアン方向にシフトしている。 As shown in FIG. 23A, in the present embodiment, in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period, the lighting period of the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period is the first half period The lighting periods of the green light source 27g (G-LED) and the blue light source 27b (B-LED) are only the second half period (tecr to t4). For this reason, the chromaticity point of the common color contributing to the reduction of the color break is shifted from the white in the white display to the cyan direction.
 このような本実施形態によれば、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて各光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯期間が上記のように配置されていることから、単色輝度(赤色の輝度)を更に向上させることができる。また、上記第2の実施形態と同様、上記第1の実施形態に比べ、白色輝度を変化させることなく単色輝度を向上させることができるので、入力画像データD1の表す画像において白色輝度が単色輝度に対して大きくなる場合に好適である。一方、各光源27r、27g,27b(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の発光パターンが上記第1の実施形態の発光パターンとは相違するものの、表示動作(液晶応答およびLED動作)は上記第1の実施形態と基本的に同様であり、上記第1の実施形態と概ね同様の効果が得られる。 According to this embodiment, since the lighting periods of the respective light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are arranged as described above in the white subframe period Tw, the single-color luminance (red Luminance) can be further improved. Further, as in the second embodiment, compared to the first embodiment, the single-color luminance can be improved without changing the white luminance, so that in the image represented by the input image data D1, the white luminance is the single-color luminance. It is suitable when it becomes large. On the other hand, although the light emission pattern of each light source 27r, 27g, 27b (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) is different from the light emission pattern of the first embodiment, the display operation (liquid crystal response and LED operation) Is basically the same as that of the first embodiment, and substantially the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained.
<3.1 第3の実施形態の第1変形例>
 上記第3の実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて後半期間(tecr~t4)の全体で、緑色光源27g(G-LED)および青色光源(B-LED)が点灯状態となっているが、1フレーム期間Tfrでの点灯時間が増大しないように当該後半期間(tecr~t4)でパルス幅変調方式により駆動される(図23(A)参照)。
<3.1 First Modification of Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, the green light source 27g (G-LED) and the blue light source (B-LED) are turned on in the entire second half period (tecr to t4) in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period. Although it is in the state, it is driven by the pulse width modulation method in the second half period (tecr to t4) so that the lighting time in one frame period Tfr does not increase (see FIG. 23A).
 これに対し本変形例では バックライト25の3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)が図24に示すように駆動される。図24(A)は、本変形例における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図24(B)は、本変形例における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間および発光量を示す図である。本変形例におけるバックライト25の駆動に関する構成以外の構成については上記第1および第2の実施形態と同様である。このため、本変形例に係る画像表示装置の構成のうち上記第1および第2の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成と同一または対応する部分には同一の参照符号を付し、詳しい説明を省略する(図1、図3、図5参照)。 On the other hand, in this modification, the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 are driven as shown in FIG. FIG. 24A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification, and FIG. 24B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification). -LED) It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity. The configuration other than the configuration relating to driving of the backlight 25 in the present modification is the same as that of the first and second embodiments. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present modification, the same or corresponding parts as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first and second embodiments are given the same reference numerals, It abbreviates (refer to Drawing 1, Drawing 3, and Drawing 5).
 図24(A)に示すように本変形例では、上記第3の実施形態とは異なり、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて緑色光源27g(G-LED)および青色光源27b(B-LED)は、パルス幅変調方式により駆動されるのではなく、その白サブフレーム期間Twの終点t4に接する所定期間において連続的に駆動される。すなわち、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて緑色光源27g(G-LED)および青色光源27b(B-LED)は、発光制御基準時点tecrよりも後の時刻t31に点灯を開始し、時刻t31からその白サブフレーム期間Twの終点t4まで連続的な点灯状態となる。3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)についてのその他の動作は上記第3の実施形態と同様である。 As shown in FIG. 24A, in this modification, unlike the third embodiment, the green light source 27g (G-LED) and the blue light source 27b (B-LED) are pulsed in the white subframe period Tw. It is not driven by the width modulation method, but is continuously driven in a predetermined period in contact with the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw. That is, in the white sub-frame period Tw, the green light source 27g (G-LED) and the blue light source 27b (B-LED) start lighting at time t31 after the light emission control reference time point tecr. The lighting state continues until the end point t4 of the frame period Tw. The other operations of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are the same as in the third embodiment.
 図24(A)に示すように本実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて、先行サブフレーム期間に対応する赤色光源27r(R-LED)の点灯期間は前半期間(t3~tecr)のみであり、緑色光源27g(G-LED)および青色光源27b(B-LED)の点灯期間は後半期間における終点に近い期間(t31~t4)のみである。このため、色割れ低減に寄与する共通色の色度点が白表示における白色からシアン方向にシフトしている。 As shown in FIG. 24A, in the present embodiment, in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period, the lighting period of the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period is the first half period ( The lighting period of the green light source 27g (G-LED) and the blue light source 27b (B-LED) is only the period (t31 to t4) close to the end point in the second half period. For this reason, the chromaticity point of the common color contributing to the reduction of the color break is shifted from the white in the white display to the cyan direction.
 このような本実施形態によれば、白サブフレーム期間Twにおける各光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯期間が上記のように配置されていることから、上記第3の実施形態と同様の効果を奏しつつ、単色輝度を更に向上させることができる。 According to this embodiment, since the lighting periods of the light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in the white subframe period Tw are arranged as described above, The single-color luminance can be further improved while achieving the same effect as that of the embodiment.
<4.第4の実施形態>
 次に、第4の実施形態に係る画像表示装置について説明する。
 図26(A)は、本実施形態における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図26(B)は、本実施形態における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間および発光量を示す図である。また図25(A)は、本変形例に対応する従来例における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図25(B)は、この従来例における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間を示す図である。この従来例は、図8、図18、図22に示した第1従来例と同じものである。
<4. Fourth embodiment>
Next, an image display apparatus according to a fourth embodiment will be described.
FIG. 26A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in the present embodiment, and FIG. 26B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in the present embodiment). -LED) It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity. FIG. 25 (A) is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in the conventional example corresponding to the present modification, and FIG. 25 (B) is a three primary color light source (R-LED in this conventional example). , G-LED, B-LED) is a diagram showing the lighting time of each. This prior art example is the same as the first prior art example shown in FIG. 8, FIG. 18 and FIG.
 上記第1から第3の実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて、後続サブフレーム期間に対応する青色光源27b(B-LED)は、発光制御基準時点tecrに点灯を開始し、その白サブフレーム期間Twの終点t4まで点灯状態である(図9、図19、図23参照)。これに対し本実施形態では、図26(A)に示すように、白サブフレーム期間Twでは、青色光源(B-LED)は点灯せず、後続サブフレーム期間である青サブフレーム期間Tbでのみ点灯状態となっている。本実施形態におけるバックライト25の3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)についての他の動作は上記第2の実施形態と実質的に同様であり、1フレーム期間Tfrでの各光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯時間が増大せず従来例と同じである点も上記第12の実施形態と同様である(図25、図26参照)。また図26(B)に示すように、本実施形態においても、上記第2および第3の実施形態と同様、白バランスをとるための1フレーム期間Tfr(TOTAL)での3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯時間の割合が1:2/3:1となるように、3原色光源のそれぞれの点灯時における電流値が予め設定されている。 In the first to third embodiments, in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period, the blue light source 27b (B-LED) corresponding to the subsequent subframe period lights up at the light emission control reference time point tecr. The light emission state is started until the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw is started (see FIG. 9, FIG. 19, and FIG. 23). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26A, the blue light source (B-LED) is not turned on in the white subframe period Tw, and only in the blue subframe period Tb which is the subsequent subframe period. It is lit. The other operations of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 in the present embodiment are substantially the same as those in the second embodiment, and one operation is performed in one frame period Tfr. The point of the lighting time of each light source (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) is the same as that of the conventional example without any increase, which is also the same as the twelfth embodiment (see FIGS. 25 and 26). Further, as shown in FIG. 26B, also in this embodiment, as in the second and third embodiments, three primary color light sources (R−) in one frame period Tfr (TOTAL) for achieving white balance. The current value at the time of lighting of each of the three primary color light sources is preset so that the ratio of the lighting time of LED, G-LED, B-LED) is 1: 2/3: 1.
 本実施形態におけるバックライト駆動回路23はバックライト25の3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)が上記のように動作するよう構成されているが、本実施形態における他の構成は上記第1から第3の実施形態と同様である。このため、本実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成のうち上記第1から第3の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成と同一または対応する部分には同一の参照符号を付し、詳しい説明を省略する(図1、図3、図5参照)。 The backlight drive circuit 23 in the present embodiment is configured such that the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 operate as described above, but other light sources in the present embodiment The configuration is the same as that of the first to third embodiments. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present embodiment, the same reference numerals as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first to third embodiments denote the same or corresponding parts. It abbreviates (refer to Drawing 1, Drawing 3, and Drawing 5).
 図26(A)に示すように本実施形態では、後続サブフレーム期間としての青サブフレーム期間Tbに対応する青色光源27b(B-LED)は、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twでは点灯せず、青サブフレーム期間Tbにおいてのみ点灯する。なお図26(A)に示す例では、青色光源27bは、青サブフレーム期間Tbの全体(t4~t5)において点灯状態となる。このため、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいてバックライト25の発光色が白表示における白色から橙色方向にシフトしている。 As shown in FIG. 26A, in the present embodiment, the blue light source 27b (B-LED) corresponding to the blue subframe period Tb as a subsequent subframe period is a white subframe period Tw as a common color subframe period. In this case, it does not turn on, but turns on only in the blue subframe period Tb. In the example shown in FIG. 26A, the blue light source 27b is in the lighting state in the entire blue sub-frame period Tb (t4 to t5). Therefore, the emission color of the backlight 25 is shifted from white in white display to orange in the white subframe period Tw.
 このような本実施形態によれば、各フレーム期間Tfrにおいて各光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯期間が上記のように配置されていることから、白色輝度を変化させることなく単色輝度を向上させることができる。このため、入力画像データD1に対し調整係数Ksを用いて増幅処理を施す場合において白色輝度が単色輝度に対して大きくなるときには本実施形態は特に有効である。一方、各光源27r、27g,27b(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の発光パターンが上記第1の実施形態の発光パターンとは相違するものの、表示動作(液晶応答およびLED動作)は上記第1の実施形態と基本的に同様であり、上記第1の実施形態と概ね同様の効果が得られる。 According to this embodiment, since the lighting periods of the respective light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are arranged as described above in each frame period Tfr, the white luminance is changed. It is possible to improve single-color luminance without For this reason, in the case where amplification processing is performed on the input image data D1 using the adjustment coefficient Ks, the present embodiment is particularly effective when the white luminance becomes larger than the single luminance. On the other hand, although the light emission pattern of each light source 27r, 27g, 27b (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) is different from the light emission pattern of the first embodiment, the display operation (liquid crystal response and LED operation) Is basically the same as that of the first embodiment, and substantially the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained.
<4.1 第4の実施形態の第1変形例>
 上記第4の実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて後半期間(tecr~t4)の全体で緑色光源27g(G-LED)が点灯状態となっているが、1フレーム期間Tfrでの点灯時間が増大しないように当該後半期間(tecr~t4)でパルス幅変調方式により駆動される(図26(A)参照)。
<First Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, the green light source 27g (G-LED) is lit in the entire second half period (tecr to t4) in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period, but one frame Driving is performed by the pulse width modulation method in the second half period (tecr to t4) so that the lighting time in the period Tfr does not increase (see FIG. 26A).
 これに対し本変形例では バックライト25の3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)が図27に示すように駆動される。図27(A)は、本変形例における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図27(B)は、本変形例における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間および発光量を示す図である。本変形例におけるバックライト25の駆動に関する構成以外の構成については上記第1~第4の実施形態と同様である。このため、本変形例に係る画像表示装置の構成のうち上記第1~第4の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成と同一または対応する部分には同一の参照符号を付し、詳しい説明を省略する(図1、図3、図5参照)。 On the other hand, in this modification, the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 are driven as shown in FIG. FIG. 27A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification, and FIG. 27B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification). -LED) It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity. The configuration other than the configuration relating to the driving of the backlight 25 in this modification is the same as that of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present modification, the same or corresponding parts as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first to fourth embodiments are given the same reference numerals, It abbreviates (refer to Drawing 1, Drawing 3, and Drawing 5).
 図27(A)に示すように本変形例では、上記第4の実施形態とは異なり、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて緑色光源27g(G-LED)は、パルス幅変調方式により駆動されるのではなく、その白サブフレーム期間Twの終点t4に接する所定期間において連続的に駆動される。すなわち、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて緑色光源27gは、発光制御基準時点tecrよりも後の時刻t31に点灯を開始し、時刻t31からその白サブフレーム期間Twの終点t4まで連続的な点灯状態となる。3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)についてのその他の動作は上記第4の実施形態と同様である。 As shown in FIG. 27A, in this modification, unlike the fourth embodiment, the green light source 27g (G-LED) is driven by the pulse width modulation method in the white subframe period Tw. Instead, the white subframe period Tw is continuously driven in a predetermined period in contact with the end point t4. That is, in the white subframe period Tw, the green light source 27g starts lighting at time t31 after the light emission control reference time point tecr, and is continuously lit from time t31 to the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw. . The other operations of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are the same as in the fourth embodiment.
 図27(A)に示すように本実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて、先行サブフレーム期間に対応する赤色光源27r(R-LED)の点灯期間は後半期間(t3~tecr)のみであり、緑色光源27g(G-LED)の点灯期間は後半期間における終点に近い期間(t31~t4)のみとなっている。このため、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいてバックライト25の発光色が白表示における白から橙色方向にシフトしている。 As shown in FIG. 27A, in this embodiment, in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period, the lighting period of the red light source 27r (R-LED) corresponding to the preceding subframe period is the second half period ( The lighting period of the green light source 27g (G-LED) is only the period (t31 to t4) close to the end point in the second half period. Therefore, in the white subframe period Tw, the light emission color of the backlight 25 is shifted from white in the white display to the orange direction.
 このような本実施形態によれば、各フレーム期間Tfrにおける各光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)の点灯期間が上記のように配置されていることから、上記第4の実施形態と同様の効果を奏しつつ、単色輝度を更に向上させることができる。 According to the present embodiment, since the lighting periods of the light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) in each frame period Tfr are arranged as described above, the fourth embodiment is preferable. It is possible to further improve single-color luminance while achieving the same effect as that of the embodiment.
<4.2 第4の実施形態の第2変形例>
 上記第4の実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて、赤色光源27r(R-LED)は前半期間(t3~tecr)で非点灯状態で後半期間(tecr~t4)で点灯状態であり、緑色光源27g(G-LED)も、後半期間(tecr~t4)でのみ点灯状態となっているが、1フレーム期間Tfrでの点灯時間が増大しないように当該後半期間(tecr~t4)でパルス幅変調方式により駆動される(図26(A)参照)。
4.2 Second Modification of Fourth Embodiment
In the fourth embodiment, in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period, the red light source 27r (R-LED) is in the first half period (t3 to tecr) and in the second half period (tecr to t4) in the non-lighting state. The green light source 27g (G-LED) is also lit only in the second half period (tecr to t4), but the second half period (G-LED) does not increase the lighting time in one frame period Tfr. It is driven by pulse width modulation at tecr to t4) (see FIG. 26A).
 これに対し本変形例では バックライト25の3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)が図28に示すように駆動される。図28(A)は、本変形例における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図28(B)は、本変形例における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間および発光量を示す図である。本変形例におけるバックライト25の駆動に関する構成以外の構成については上記第1~第4の実施形態と同様である。このため、本変形例に係る画像表示装置の構成のうち上記第1~第4の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成と同一または対応する部分には同一の参照符号を付し、詳しい説明を省略する(図1、図3、図5参照)。 On the other hand, in this modification, the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 are driven as shown in FIG. FIG. 28A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification, and FIG. 28B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification). -LED) It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity. The configuration other than the configuration relating to the driving of the backlight 25 in this modification is the same as that of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present modification, the same or corresponding parts as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first to fourth embodiments are given the same reference numerals, It abbreviates (refer to Drawing 1, Drawing 3, and Drawing 5).
 図28(B)に示すように本変形例では、上記第2から第4の実施形態と同様、1フレーム期間Tfrでの緑色光源(G-LED)の点灯時間は増大しない(図18、図25等に示す従来例と同様)。しかし、図28(A)に示すように本変形例では、上記第4の実施形態とは異なり、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて緑色光源27g(G-LED)は、パルス幅変調方式により駆動されるのではなく、その白サブフレーム期間Twの終点t4に接する所定期間において連続的に駆動される。この点で本変形例は、上記第4の実施形態の第1変形例と同様である(図27参照)。しかし、図28(A)に示すように本変形例では、上記第4の実施形態およびその第1変形例とは異なり、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて赤色光源27r(R-LED)の点灯期間が、その白サブフレーム期間Twの始点t3と終点t4にそれぞれ接する第1期間(t3~t31)と第2期間(t32~t4)に分離されている。赤色光源27rは、第1期間の終点t31から第2期間の始点t32までは非点状態となる。このことから、色割れ低減に寄与する共通色の色度点が白表示における白色から黄色方向にシフトしている。3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)についてのその他の動作は上記第4の実施形態と同様である。 As shown in FIG. 28B, in the present modification, the lighting time of the green light source (G-LED) in one frame period Tfr does not increase as in the second to fourth embodiments (FIG. 18, FIG. 25 and so forth). However, as shown in FIG. 28A, in this modification, unlike the fourth embodiment, the green light source 27g (G-LED) is driven by the pulse width modulation method in the white subframe period Tw. Instead, the white subframe period Tw is continuously driven in a predetermined period in contact with the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw. In this point, the present modification is the same as the first modification of the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 27). However, as shown in FIG. 28A, in this modification, unlike the fourth embodiment and its first modification, the lighting period of the red light source 27r (R-LED) is in the white subframe period Tw. The white subframe period Tw is separated into a first period (t3 to t31) and a second period (t32 to t4) respectively in contact with the start point t3 and the end point t4. The red light source 27r is astigmatic from the end point t31 of the first period to the start point t32 of the second period. From this, the chromaticity point of the common color contributing to the reduction of color break shifts from white to yellow in white display. The other operations of the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) are the same as in the fourth embodiment.
 このような本変形例によれば、上記第4の実施形態と同様の効果を奏しつつ、先行サブフレーム期間Trに対応する原色である赤色の輝度(単色輝度)を更に向上させることができる。なお本変形例では、白サブフレーム期間Twに発光色として得られる白色の色度点をシフトさせることなく白サブフレーム期間Twにおける赤色光源27rの点灯期間を第1期間と第2期間とに分離することも可能である(図28(B)参照)。 According to such a modification, it is possible to further improve the luminance (monochromatic luminance) of the primary color corresponding to the preceding subframe period Tr while achieving the same effect as that of the fourth embodiment. In this modification, the lighting period of the red light source 27r in the white subframe period Tw is separated into the first period and the second period without shifting the chromaticity point of white obtained as the emission color in the white subframe period Tw. It is also possible to do (see FIG. 28B).
<4.3 第4の実施形態の第3変形例>
 上記第4の実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて、赤色光源27r(R-LED)は前半期間(t3~tecr)で非点灯状態で後半期間(tecr~t4)で点灯状態であり、緑色光源27g(G-LED)も、後半期間(tecr~t4)でのみ点灯状態となっているが、1フレーム期間Tfrでの点灯時間が増大しないように当該後半期間(tecr~t4)でパルス幅変調方式により駆動される(図26(A)参照)。
4.3 Third Modification of Fourth Embodiment
In the fourth embodiment, in the white subframe period Tw as the common color subframe period, the red light source 27r (R-LED) is in the first half period (t3 to tecr) and in the second half period (tecr to t4) in the non-lighting state. The green light source 27g (G-LED) is also lit only in the second half period (tecr to t4), but the second half period (G-LED) does not increase the lighting time in one frame period Tfr. It is driven by pulse width modulation at tecr to t4) (see FIG. 26A).
 これに対し本変形例では バックライト25の3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)が図29に示すように駆動される。図29(A)は、本変形例における表示動作を説明するためのタイミングチャートおよび波形図であり、図29(B)は、本変形例における3原色光源(R-LED、G-LED、B-LED)それぞれの点灯時間および発光量を示す図である。本変形例におけるバックライト25の駆動に関する構成以外の構成については上記第1~第4の実施形態と同様である。このため、本変形例に係る画像表示装置の構成のうち上記第1~第4の実施形態に係る画像表示装置の構成と同一または対応する部分には同一の参照符号を付し、詳しい説明を省略する(図1、図3、図5参照)。 On the other hand, in this modification, the three primary color light sources (R-LED, G-LED, B-LED) of the backlight 25 are driven as shown in FIG. FIG. 29A is a timing chart and waveform chart for explaining the display operation in this modification, and FIG. 29B is a three primary color light source (R-LED, G-LED, B in this modification). -LED) It is a figure which shows each lighting time and light-emission quantity. The configuration other than the configuration relating to the driving of the backlight 25 in this modification is the same as that of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, in the configuration of the image display device according to the present modification, the same or corresponding parts as those in the configuration of the image display device according to the first to fourth embodiments are given the same reference numerals, It abbreviates (refer to Drawing 1, Drawing 3, and Drawing 5).
 図29(B)に示すように本変形例では、上記第2から第4の実施形態と同様、1フレーム期間Tfrでの緑色光源(G-LED)の点灯時間は増大しない(図18、図25等に示す従来例と同様)。しかし、図29(A)に示すように本変形例では、上記第4の実施形態とは異なり、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて緑色光源27g(G-LED)は、パルス幅変調方式により駆動されるのではなく、その白サブフレーム期間Twの終点t4に接する所定期間において連続的に駆動される。この点で本変形例は、上記第4の実施形態の第1変形例と同様である(図27参照)。しかし、図29(A)に示すように本変形例では、上記第4の実施形態およびその第1変形例とは異なり、白サブフレーム期間Twにおいて赤色光源27r(R-LED)は、その前半期間(t3~tecr)において点灯状態となり、その後半期間(tecr~t4)では非点灯状態である。 As shown in FIG. 29 (B), in this modification, the lighting time of the green light source (G-LED) in one frame period Tfr does not increase as in the second to fourth embodiments (FIG. 18, FIG. 25 and so forth). However, as shown in FIG. 29A, in this modification, unlike the fourth embodiment, the green light source 27g (G-LED) is driven by the pulse width modulation method in the white subframe period Tw. Instead, the white subframe period Tw is continuously driven in a predetermined period in contact with the end point t4 of the white subframe period Tw. In this point, the present modification is the same as the first modification of the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 27). However, as shown in FIG. 29A, in this modification, unlike the fourth embodiment and the first modification, the red light source 27r (R-LED) is in the first half in the white subframe period Tw. In the period (t3 to tecr), the light is on, and in the second half period (tecr to t4), the light is off.
 このような本変形例によれば、上記第4の実施形態と同様の効果を奏しつつ、先行サブフレーム期間Trに対応する原色である赤色の輝度(単色輝度)を更に向上させることができる。 According to such a modification, it is possible to further improve the luminance (monochromatic luminance) of the primary color corresponding to the preceding subframe period Tr while achieving the same effect as that of the fourth embodiment.
<5.他の変形例>
 本発明は上記各実施形態および上記変形例に限定されるものではなく、本発明の範囲を逸脱しない限りにおいてさらに種々の変形を施すことができる。
<5. Other Modifications>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and the above-described modifications, and various modifications may be made without departing from the scope of the present invention.
 上記各実施形態では、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白サブフレーム期間Twの直前のサブフレーム期間(先行サブフレーム期間)は赤サブフレーム期間Trであり、直後のサブフレーム期間(後続サブフレーム期間)は青サブフレーム期間Tbであり、共通色サブフレーム期間の直前および直後を除くサブフレーム期間は緑サブフレーム期間Tgであるが(図7、図9参照)、各フレーム期間におけるサブフレーム期間Tr,Tg,Tb,Twの順番はこれに限定されない。各光源27r,27g,27bの特性(R-LED、G-LED、B-LEDそれぞれの順方向電圧VFおよび発光スペクトル等)や、タイプ(蛍光体の使用等)、電流等によって上記とは異なる順番とするのが好ましい場合もある。 In the above embodiments, the subframe period immediately before the white subframe period Tw (preceding subframe period) as the common color subframe period is the red subframe period Tr, and the immediately following subframe period (following subframe period) Is the blue sub-frame period Tb, and the sub-frame period except immediately before and after the common color sub-frame period is the green sub-frame period Tg (see FIG. 7 and FIG. 9). The order of Tg, Tb and Tw is not limited to this. Different from the above depending on the characteristics of each light source 27r, 27g, 27b (forward voltage VF and emission spectrum of R-LED, G-LED, B-LED, etc.), type (use of phosphor etc.), current etc. In some cases it may be preferable to take order.
 また上記各実施形態では、各フレーム期間は、青、緑、赤の原色サブフレーム期間と共通色サブフレーム期間としての白のサブフレーム期間(青、緑、青の共通色である白のサブフレーム)とから構成されるが、これに代えて、他の原色のサブフレーム期間と共通色サブフレーム期間から構成されていてもよい。なお本明細書において、「共通色」は、基本的には、各フレーム期間内の原色サブフレーム期間に対応する原色の色成分を全て含む色であり、これらの色成分の比率は問わないものとする。ただし、共通色サブフレームによって色割れを抑制するという観点からは、共通色サブフレーム期間としての白のサブフレーム期間に代えて、2つの原色から構成される他の色に対応する共通色サブフレーム期間(例えば赤と緑から構成される黄色のサブフレーム期間)を使用してもよい。また、同様の観点から、「白色」や「黄色」に代えて、「黄緑色」、「赤色」、または「輝度半分の赤色」等、黒色以外の任意の色を共通色サブフレーム期間に対応させることも可能である。 In each of the above embodiments, each frame period is a blue, green, red primary color subframe period and a white subframe period as a common color subframe period (a white subframe which is a blue, green, blue common color) And sub-frame periods of other primary colors and common-color sub-frame periods. In the present specification, the “common color” is basically a color including all the color components of the primary colors corresponding to the primary color sub-frame period in each frame period, and the ratio of these color components is not limited. I assume. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing color breakup by a common color sub-frame, a common color sub-frame corresponding to another color composed of two primary colors instead of the white sub-frame period as a common color sub-frame period A period (eg, a yellow subframe period consisting of red and green) may be used. Also, from the same point of view, any color other than black, such as “yellow-green”, “red” or “red half of brightness” instead of “white” or “yellow” corresponds to the common color subframe period It is also possible to
 さらに上記各実施形態では、分配割合WRsと調整係数Ksにつき、固定値の場合のみならず、特定の計算式に従い分配割合WRsと調整係数Ksを求める場合についても説明してきたが、分配割合WRsと係数Ksを求める計算式は上記で説明したもの以外でもよい。例えば、分配割合WRsを求める計算式として、従来から知られた計算式を用いてもよい。 Further, in each of the above embodiments, the distribution ratio WRs and the adjustment coefficient Ks have been described not only in the case of fixed values but also in the case where the distribution ratio WRs and the adjustment coefficient Ks are obtained according to a specific formula. Calculation formulas for obtaining the coefficient Ks may be other than those described above. For example, a conventionally known calculation formula may be used as a calculation formula for determining the distribution ratio WRs.
 さらにまた上記各実施形態では、光源部としてのバックライト25からの光を透過する液晶パネル24が表示デバイスとして使用され液晶パネル24における透過率を制御することにより画像が表示されるが、本発明は、液晶パネル24のような透過型の光変調器を使用したフィールドシーケンシャル方式の表示装置に限定されず、反射型の光変調器を使用したフィールドシーケンシャル方式の表示装置にも適用することができる。例えば、LCOS(Liquid Crystal On Silicon)と呼ばれる反射型の液晶パネルを光変調器として使用したフィールドシーケンシャル方式の投写型表示装置も本発明を適用することができる。また本発明は、液晶表示装置以外のフィールドシーケンシャル方式の画像表示装置、例えば有機EL(ElectroLuminescence)表示装置等の自発光型の画像表示装置にも適用することができる。さらに本発明は、表示パネルの後方を透けて見せる機能を有するシースルー画像表示装置などに適用することもできる。 Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, the liquid crystal panel 24 that transmits light from the backlight 25 as a light source unit is used as a display device, and an image is displayed by controlling the transmittance of the liquid crystal panel 24. The present invention is not limited to a field sequential display using a transmissive light modulator such as the liquid crystal panel 24, but can be applied to a field sequential display using a reflective light modulator. . For example, the present invention can be applied to a field sequential type projection display apparatus using a reflective liquid crystal panel called LCOS (Liquid Crystal On Silicon) as a light modulator. The present invention can also be applied to field sequential type image display devices other than liquid crystal display devices, for example, self-luminous type image display devices such as organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices. Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a see-through image display device or the like having a function of making the back of the display panel visible.
 なお、以上において各実施形態およびその変形例に係る画像表示装置について説明してきたが、これらの実施形態およびその変形例に係る画像表示装置の特徴をその性質に反しない限り任意に組合せて、各種の変形例に係る画像表示装置を構成することもできる。 Although the image display apparatus according to each embodiment and its modification has been described above, various features of the image display apparatus according to these embodiments and its modification may be combined arbitrarily as long as not against the nature thereof. An image display apparatus according to a modification of the above can also be configured.
<6.その他>
 本願は、2017年6月29日に出願された「フィールドシーケンシャル方式の画像表示装置および画像表示方法」という名称の日本国特願2017-127361号に基づく優先権を主張する出願であり、この日本国出願の内容は引用することによって本願の中に含まれる。
<6. Other>
The present application is an application for claiming priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2017-127361 entitled "Field-sequential type image display device and image display method" filed on June 29, 2017, The content of the national application is included in the present application by reference.
 1 …画像表示装置
 10…画像データ変換部
 20…表示部
 11…パラメータ記憶部
 12…統計値/彩度演算部
 13…分配割合/係数演算部
 33…駆動用画像データ演算部
 21…タイミング制御回路
 22…パネル駆動回路(光変調部駆動回路)
 23…バックライト駆動回路(光源部駆動回路)
 24…液晶パネル(光変調部)
 25…バックライト(光源部)
 26…画素
 27…光源
 27r…赤色光源(R-LED)
 27g…緑色光源(G-LED)
 27b…青色光源(B-LED)
 Ks   …調整係数
 WRs  …白サブフレームの分配割合(共通色分配割合)
 WRs1 …第1分配割合
 WRsv2…第2分配割合
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Image display apparatus 10 ... Image data conversion part 20 ... Display part 11 ... Parameter memory part 12 ... Statistical value / saturation calculating part 13 ... Distribution ratio / coefficient calculating part 33 ... Driving image data calculating part 21 ... Timing control circuit 22 ... panel drive circuit (light modulation unit drive circuit)
23 ... back light drive circuit (light source drive circuit)
24 ... liquid crystal panel (light modulation unit)
25 ... back light (light source part)
26: pixel 27: light source 27r: red light source (R-LED)
27g green light source (G-LED)
27b Blue light source (B-LED)
Ks: Adjustment factor WRs: Distribution ratio of white subframes (common color distribution ratio)
WRs1 ... first distribution ratio WRsv2 ... second distribution ratio

Claims (19)

  1.  複数の原色にそれぞれ対応する複数の原色サブフレーム期間と共通色サブフレーム期間とからなる複数のサブフレーム期間が各フレーム期間に含まれるフィールドシーケンシャル方式の画像表示装置であって、
     前記複数の原色でそれぞれ発光する複数の光源を含む光源部と、
     前記光源部からの光を透過または反射させる光変調部と、
     各サブフレーム期間において対応する色の光が前記光変調部に照射されるように前記光源部を駆動する光源部駆動回路と、
     各サブフレーム期間で対応する色の画像が表示されるように前記光変調部における透過率または反射率を制御する光変調部駆動回路とを備え、
     前記光源部駆動回路は、前記共通色サブフレーム期間の始点から前記共通色サブフレーム期間においてその直前のサブフレーム期間である先行サブフレーム期間に対応する第1の原色の光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間、および、前記共通色サブフレーム期間の直後のサブフレーム期間である後続サブフレーム期間の始点から当該後続サブフレーム期間において対応する第2の原色の光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間のうち少なくとも一方は、前記複数の原色のうち前記第1および第2の原色以外の他の原色に対応する原色サブフレーム期間の始点から当該原色サブフレーム期間において光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間よりも短くなるように、前記光源部を駆動する、画像表示装置。
    A field sequential type image display device including a plurality of sub-frame periods each including a plurality of primary color sub-frame periods corresponding to a plurality of primary colors and a common color sub-frame period included in each frame period.
    A light source unit including a plurality of light sources emitting light in the plurality of primary colors;
    A light modulation unit that transmits or reflects light from the light source unit;
    A light source unit driving circuit for driving the light source unit such that light of a corresponding color is emitted to the light modulation unit in each subframe period;
    A light modulation unit driving circuit for controlling the transmittance or the reflectance of the light modulation unit so that an image of a corresponding color is displayed in each subframe period;
    The light source unit drive circuit is configured to start lighting the light source of the first primary color corresponding to the preceding subframe period which is the immediately preceding subframe period in the common color subframe period from the start point of the common color subframe period And the time from the start of the subsequent subframe period which is a subframe period immediately after the common color subframe period to the time when the light source of the corresponding second primary color starts lighting in the subsequent subframe period Of at least one of the plurality of primary colors from a start point of a primary color sub-frame period corresponding to another primary color other than the first and second primary colors to a time point when the light source starts lighting in the primary color The image display apparatus which drives the said light source part so that it may become shorter than time.
  2.  前記複数の原色に対応する入力画像データを受け取り、前記先行サブフレーム期間から前記共通色サブフレーム期間に切り替わる時に前記光変調部における透過率または反射率が実質的に変化しないかまたは低下し、かつ、前記共通色サブフレーム期間から前記後続サブフレーム期間に切り替わる時に前記光変調部における透過率または反射率が実質的に変化しないかまたは上昇するように、当該入力画像データから前記複数のサブフレーム期間に対応する駆動用画像データを生成する画像データ変換部を更に備え、
     前記光変調部駆動回路は、前記駆動用画像データに基づき、各サブフレーム期間で対応する色の画像が表示されるように前記光変調部における透過率または反射率を制御する、請求項1に記載の画像表示装置。
    When the input image data corresponding to the plurality of primary colors is received, the transmittance or the reflectance in the light modulation unit does not substantially change or decrease when the preceding subframe period is switched to the common color subframe period, and The plurality of subframe periods from the input image data such that the transmittance or the reflectance in the light modulator does not substantially change or increase when switching from the common color subframe period to the subsequent subframe period. An image data conversion unit for generating driving image data corresponding to
    The light modulation unit drive circuit controls the transmittance or the reflectance in the light modulation unit so that an image of a corresponding color is displayed in each subframe period based on the driving image data. Image display device as described.
  3.  前記画像データ変換部は、前記共通色サブフレーム期間における各光源の輝度の当該光源の前記原色サブフレーム期間における輝度に対する比をWBRとするとき、前記入力画像データの表す入力画像の各画素につき、当該画素の表示のために1フレーム期間で発すべき共通色成分の表示光量のうち共通色サブフレーム期間で発すべき表示光量の割合として定義される共通色分配割合が略WBR/(1+WBR)となるように、当該画素の値から前記複数のサブフレーム期間のそれぞれにおける画素データ値を求めることにより、前記複数のサブフレーム期間に対応する駆動用画像データを生成する、請求項2に記載の画像表示装置。 When the ratio of the luminance of each light source in the common color sub-frame period to the luminance in the primary color sub-frame period of the light source in the common color sub-frame period is WBR, the image data conversion unit The common color distribution ratio defined as the ratio of the display light amount to be emitted in the common color sub-frame period to the display light amount of the common color component to be emitted in one frame period to display the pixel is approximately WBR / (1 + WBR) The image display according to claim 2, wherein driving image data corresponding to the plurality of subframe periods is generated by obtaining pixel data values in each of the plurality of subframe periods from the value of the pixel. apparatus.
  4.  前記共通色サブフレーム期間の始点から前記共通色サブフレーム期間において前記第1の原色の光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間が、前記他の原色に対応する原色サブフレーム期間の始点から当該原色サブフレーム期間において光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間よりも短い場合には、前記共通色サブフレーム期間において前記第1の原色の光源が点灯を開始する時点で前記光変調部は光学応答の過渡状態にあり、
     前記後続サブフレーム期間の始点から前記後続サブフレーム期間において前記第2の原色の光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間が、前記他の原色に対応する原色サブフレーム期間の始点から当該原色サブフレーム期間において光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間よりも短い場合には、前記後続サブフレーム期間において前記第2の原色の光源が点灯を開始する時点で前記光変調部は光学応答の過渡状態にある、請求項1から3のいずれか1項に記載の画像表示装置。
    The time from the start of the common color sub-frame period to the time when the light source of the first primary color starts lighting in the common color sub-frame period is the start color of the primary color sub-frame period corresponding to the other primary color When the light source in the sub-frame period is shorter than the time until the light source starts lighting, the light modulation unit generates an optical response when the light source of the first primary color starts lighting in the common color sub-frame period. In transient state,
    The time from the start of the subsequent sub-frame period to the time when the light source of the second primary color starts lighting in the subsequent sub-frame period is the primary color sub-frame from the start of the primary color sub-frame period corresponding to the other primary color If it is shorter than the time until the light source starts lighting in the period, the light modulation unit enters an optical response transient state when the light source of the second primary color starts lighting in the subsequent subframe period. The image display apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
  5.  前記光変調部は、画像データを書き込み可能であって、書き込まれた画像データに応じて前記光源部からの光を透過または反射させるように構成されており、
     前記光変調部駆動回路は、各サブフレーム期間において対応する色の画像を表す画像データを前記光変調部に書き込むことにより、当該対応する色の画像が表示されるように前記光変調部における透過率または反射率を制御し、
     前記光源部駆動回路は、前記複数のサブフレーム期間のそれぞれにおいて前記画像データの前記光変調部への書き込みが終了した時点以後の時点として予め設定された発光制御基準時点に基づき、前記他の原色に対応する原色サブフレーム期間において光源の点灯開始時点が前記発光制御基準時点であり、かつ、前記共通色サブフレーム期間における前記第1の原色の光源の点灯開始時点および前記後続サブフレーム期間における前記第2の原色の光源の点灯開始時点のうち少なくとも一方が当該サブフレーム期間における前記発光制御基準時点よりも早くなるように、前記光源部を駆動する、請求項1から3のいずれか1項に記載の画像表示装置。
    The light modulation unit is capable of writing image data, and is configured to transmit or reflect light from the light source unit according to the written image data.
    The light modulation unit drive circuit transmits the light modulation unit so that the image of the corresponding color is displayed by writing image data representing the image of the corresponding color in each sub-frame period to the light modulation unit. Control the rate or reflectance,
    The light source unit drive circuit is configured to set the other primary color based on a light emission control reference time point preset as a time point after writing of the image data to the light modulation section is completed in each of the plurality of subframe periods. The lighting start time point of the light source in the primary color sub-frame period corresponding to is the light emission control reference time point, and the lighting start time point of the light source of the first primary color in the common color sub-frame period 4. The light source unit according to claim 1, wherein the light source unit is driven such that at least one of the lighting start times of the light source of the second primary color is earlier than the light emission control reference time in the subframe period. Image display device as described.
  6.  前記光源部駆動回路は、前記共通色サブフレーム期間において前記光変調部が光学応答の過渡状態にある時に前記第1の原色の光源が点灯を開始し、かつ、前記後続サブフレーム期間において前記光変調部が光学応答の過渡状態にある時に前記第2の原色の光源が点灯を開始し、かつ、前記他の原色に対応する原色サブフレーム期間において前記光変調部における光学応答の過渡状態が終了した後に光源が点灯を開始するように、前記光源部を駆動する、請求項5に記載の画像表示装置。 The light source unit drive circuit causes the light source of the first primary color to start lighting when the light modulation unit is in a transient state of the optical response in the common color subframe period, and the light in the subsequent subframe period. The light source of the second primary color starts to light when the modulator is in the transient state of the optical response, and the transient state of the optical response in the light modulator is ended in the primary color subframe period corresponding to the other primary color The image display apparatus according to claim 5, wherein the light source unit is driven such that the light source starts to light after being turned on.
  7.  前記光源部駆動回路は、前記共通色サブフレーム期間において前記第1の原色の光源が点灯している時間である第1の点灯時間が、前記共通色サブフレーム期間において前記第1の原色以外の他の原色の光源が点灯している時間である他の点灯時間よりも長くなるように、前記光源部を駆動する、請求項1から5のいずれか1項に記載の画像表示装置。 The light source unit drive circuit is configured such that a first lighting time, which is a time during which the light source of the first primary color is on in the common color sub-frame period, is other than the first primary color in the common color sub-frame period. The image display apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the light source unit is driven to be longer than another lighting time which is a time during which the light source of the other primary color is on.
  8.  前記光源部駆動回路は、前記後続サブフレーム期間において前記第2の原色の光源が点灯している時間である第2の点灯時間が、前記第1の点灯時間と前記他の点灯時間との差に基づき前記第1の点灯時間に応じた長さとなるように、前記光源部を駆動する、請求項7に記載の画像表示装置。 The light source unit drive circuit is configured such that a second lighting time, which is a time during which the light source of the second primary color is on in the subsequent subframe period, is a difference between the first lighting time and the other lighting time. The image display apparatus according to claim 7, wherein the light source unit is driven so as to have a length corresponding to the first lighting time based on the above.
  9.  前記光源部駆動回路は、各サブフレーム期間において前記他の原色に対応する光源が点灯している時間が、前記第1または第2の点灯時間と前記他の点灯時間との差に基づき前記第1または第2の点灯時間に応じた長さとなるように、前記光源部を駆動する、請求項8に記載の画像表示装置。 The light source unit driving circuit is configured to set the time during which the light source corresponding to the other primary color is on in each subframe period based on the difference between the first or second lighting time and the other lighting time. The image display apparatus according to claim 8, wherein the light source unit is driven to have a length corresponding to the first or second lighting time.
  10.  前記光源部駆動回路は、前記他の原色に対応する原色サブフレーム期間において前記光変調部の光学応答特性に応じた非点灯期間を確保しつつ白バランスを実現するような発光強度で前記複数の光源を点灯させることができるように構成されている、請求項1から5のいずれか1項に記載の画像表示装置。 The light source unit drive circuit is configured to achieve the white balance while securing a non-lighting period according to the optical response characteristic of the light modulation unit in the primary color sub-frame period corresponding to the other primary colors. The image display apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 5, configured to be capable of lighting a light source.
  11.  前記光源部駆動回路は、前記他の原色に対応する原色サブフレーム期間における光源の点灯時間が前記光変調部の光学応答特性による混色色相のずれを回避可能な最大時間であるように前記光源部を駆動する、請求項1から5のいずれか1項に記載の画像表示装置。 The light source unit drive circuit is configured such that the lighting time of the light source in the primary color sub-frame period corresponding to the other primary color is the maximum time that can avoid the color hue shift due to the optical response characteristic of the light modulation unit. The image display apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein
  12.  前記光源部駆動回路は、前記複数の原色のうち前記第1の原色以外の原色に対応する原色サブフレーム期間における対応する原色の光源の点灯時間が前記共通色サブフレーム期間における当該対応する原色の点灯時間よりも長くなるように前記光源部を駆動する、請求項1から5のいずれか1項に記載の画像表示装置。 The light source unit drive circuit is configured such that a lighting time of a light source of a corresponding primary color in a primary color sub-frame period corresponding to a primary color other than the first primary color among the plurality of primary colors is the corresponding primary color in the common color sub-frame period. The image display apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the light source unit is driven to be longer than a lighting time.
  13.  前記光源部駆動回路は、前記共通色サブフレーム期間において、前記第1の原色以外の原色の光源の点灯期間の開始時点が前記第1の光源の点灯期間の開始時点よりも遅く、かつ、前記第1の原色以外の原色の光源の点灯期間の終了時点が前記共通色サブフレーム期間の終点と一致するように、前記光源部を駆動する、請求項12に記載の画像表示装置。 The light source unit drive circuit is configured such that, in the common color sub-frame period, a start time point of a lighting period of a light source of a primary color other than the first primary color is later than a start time of a lighting period of the first light source The image display device according to claim 12, wherein the light source unit is driven such that an end point of a lighting period of a light source of a primary color other than the first primary color coincides with an end point of the common color sub-frame period.
  14.  前記光源部駆動回路は、前記共通色サブフレーム期間において、前記第1の原色の光源の点灯期間の開始時点が前記共通色サブフレーム期間の始点に一致し、かつ、前記第1の原色の光源の点灯期間の終了時点が前記共通色サブフレーム期間の終点よりも早くなるように、前記光源部を駆動する、請求項12に記載の画像表示装置。 The light source unit driving circuit is configured such that, in the common color sub-frame period, the start time point of the lighting period of the light source of the first primary color coincides with the start point of the common color sub-frame period, and the light source of the first primary color The image display apparatus according to claim 12, wherein the light source unit is driven such that an end point of a lighting period of the light source period is earlier than an end point of the common color sub-frame period.
  15.  前記光源部駆動回路は、前記第2の光源が前記後続サブフレーム期間でのみ点灯する、請求項12に記載の画像表示装置。 The image display device according to claim 12, wherein the light source unit drive circuit turns on the second light source only in the subsequent subframe period.
  16.  前記光源部駆動回路は、前記共通色サブフレーム期間において、前記第1の原色以外の原色の光源の点灯期間の開始時点が前記第1の光源の点灯期間の開始時点よりも遅く、かつ、前記第1の原色以外の原色の光源の点灯期間の終了時点が前記共通色サブフレーム期間の終点と一致するように、前記光源部を駆動する、請求項14または15に記載の画像表示装置。 The light source unit drive circuit is configured such that, in the common color sub-frame period, a start time point of a lighting period of a light source of a primary color other than the first primary color is later than a start time of a lighting period of the first light source The image display device according to claim 14, wherein the light source unit is driven such that an end point of a lighting period of a light source of a primary color other than the first primary color coincides with an end point of the common color sub-frame period.
  17.  前記光源部駆動回路は、前記共通色サブフレーム期間において、前記第1の原色の光源の点灯期間が第1および第2の点灯期間を含み、前記第1の点灯期間の開始時点が前記共通色サブフレーム期間の始点と一致し、かつ、前記第2の点灯期間の終了時点が前記共通色サブフレーム期間の終点と一致するように、前記光源部を駆動する、請求項12、13、または15に記載の画像表示装置。 In the light source unit driving circuit, in the common color sub-frame period, the lighting period of the light source of the first primary color includes first and second lighting periods, and the start time point of the first lighting period is the common color The light source unit is driven such that it coincides with the start point of a subframe period, and the end point of the second lighting period coincides with the end point of the common color subframe period. The image display device according to
  18.  複数の原色でそれぞれ発光する複数の光源を含む光源部と、前記光源部からの光を透過または反射させる光変調部とを備える画像表示装置において、前記複数の原色にそれぞれ対応する複数の原色サブフレーム期間と共通色サブフレーム期間とからなる複数のサブフレーム期間が各フレーム期間に含まれるフィールドシーケンシャル方式によりカラー画像を表示する画像表示方法であって、
     各サブフレーム期間において対応する色の光が前記光変調部に照射されるように前記光源部を駆動する光源部駆動ステップと、
     各サブフレーム期間で対応する色の画像が表示されるように前記光変調部における透過率または反射率を制御する光変調部駆動ステップとを備え、
     前記光源部駆動ステップでは、前記共通色サブフレーム期間の始点から前記共通色サブフレーム期間においてその直前のサブフレーム期間である先行サブフレーム期間に対応する第1の原色の光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間、および、前記共通色サブフレーム期間の直後のサブフレーム期間である後続サブフレーム期間の始点から当該後続サブフレーム期間において対応する第2の原色の光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間のうち少なくとも一方は、前記複数の原色のうち前記第1および第2の原色以外の他の原色に対応する原色サブフレーム期間の始点から当該原色サブフレーム期間において光源が点灯を開始する時点までの時間よりも短くなるように、前記光源部が駆動される、画像表示方法。
    In an image display device including a light source unit including a plurality of light sources emitting light in a plurality of primary colors and a light modulation unit transmitting or reflecting light from the light source unit, a plurality of primary color subs respectively corresponding to the plurality of primary colors An image display method for displaying a color image according to a field sequential method in which each frame period includes a plurality of subframe periods each including a frame period and a common color subframe period.
    A light source unit driving step of driving the light source unit such that light of a corresponding color is irradiated to the light modulation unit in each subframe period;
    And d) a light modulation unit driving step of controlling the transmittance or reflectance of the light modulation unit so that an image of a corresponding color is displayed in each subframe period.
    In the light source unit driving step, when the light source of the first primary color corresponding to the preceding subframe period which is the immediately preceding subframe period in the common color subframe period from the start point of the common color subframe period starts lighting And the time from the start of the subsequent subframe period which is a subframe period immediately after the common color subframe period to the time when the light source of the corresponding second primary color starts lighting in the subsequent subframe period Of at least one of the plurality of primary colors from a start point of a primary color sub-frame period corresponding to another primary color other than the first and second primary colors to a time point when the light source starts lighting in the primary color The image display method, wherein the light source unit is driven to be shorter than time.
  19.  前記複数の原色に対応する入力画像データを受け取り、前記先行サブフレーム期間から前記共通色サブフレーム期間に切り替わる時に前記光変調部における透過率または反射率が実質的に変化しないかまたは低下し、かつ、前記共通色サブフレーム期間から前記後続サブフレーム期間に切り替わる時に前記光変調部における透過率または反射率が実質的に変化しないかまたは上昇するように、当該入力画像データから前記複数のサブフレーム期間に対応する駆動用画像データを生成する画像データ変換ステップを更に備え、
     前記光変調部駆動ステップでは、前記駆動用画像データに基づき、各サブフレーム期間で対応する色の画像が表示されるように前記光変調部における透過率または反射率が制御される、請求項18に記載の画像表示方法。
    When the input image data corresponding to the plurality of primary colors is received, the transmittance or the reflectance in the light modulation unit does not substantially change or decrease when the preceding subframe period is switched to the common color subframe period, and The plurality of subframe periods from the input image data such that the transmittance or the reflectance in the light modulator does not substantially change or increase when switching from the common color subframe period to the subsequent subframe period. Further comprising an image data conversion step of generating drive image data corresponding to
    The light modulation unit driving step controls the transmittance or the reflectance in the light modulation unit so that an image of a corresponding color is displayed in each subframe period based on the driving image data. Image display method described in.
PCT/JP2018/023769 2017-06-29 2018-06-22 Field-sequential image display apparatus and image display method WO2019004072A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017-127361 2017-06-29
JP2017127361 2017-06-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019004072A1 true WO2019004072A1 (en) 2019-01-03

Family

ID=64741958

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2018/023769 WO2019004072A1 (en) 2017-06-29 2018-06-22 Field-sequential image display apparatus and image display method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2019004072A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113314085A (en) * 2021-06-15 2021-08-27 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 Display method and display device of display panel

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009044909A1 (en) * 2007-10-04 2009-04-09 Nec Display Solutions, Ltd. Video display device and light source driving method thereof
US20090091525A1 (en) * 2007-10-03 2009-04-09 Au Optronics Corporation Backlight Driving Method
JP2010107579A (en) * 2008-10-28 2010-05-13 Seiko Epson Corp Driving method and electro-optical device
JP2012053256A (en) * 2010-09-01 2012-03-15 Sony Corp Driving method of image display device
JP2013057717A (en) * 2011-09-07 2013-03-28 Casio Comput Co Ltd Projection apparatus, projection method and program
JP2015082024A (en) * 2013-10-22 2015-04-27 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device, driving method of display device, and electronic apparatus
WO2015087598A1 (en) * 2013-12-09 2015-06-18 シャープ株式会社 Image display device, and drive method therefor

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090091525A1 (en) * 2007-10-03 2009-04-09 Au Optronics Corporation Backlight Driving Method
WO2009044909A1 (en) * 2007-10-04 2009-04-09 Nec Display Solutions, Ltd. Video display device and light source driving method thereof
JP2010107579A (en) * 2008-10-28 2010-05-13 Seiko Epson Corp Driving method and electro-optical device
JP2012053256A (en) * 2010-09-01 2012-03-15 Sony Corp Driving method of image display device
JP2013057717A (en) * 2011-09-07 2013-03-28 Casio Comput Co Ltd Projection apparatus, projection method and program
JP2015082024A (en) * 2013-10-22 2015-04-27 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device, driving method of display device, and electronic apparatus
WO2015087598A1 (en) * 2013-12-09 2015-06-18 シャープ株式会社 Image display device, and drive method therefor

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113314085A (en) * 2021-06-15 2021-08-27 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 Display method and display device of display panel
CN113314085B (en) * 2021-06-15 2022-09-27 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 Display method and display device of display panel
US11955096B2 (en) 2021-06-15 2024-04-09 Wuhan China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. Display method of display panel, display device, and server

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR101252089B1 (en) Liquid crystal display
US7391407B2 (en) Back-light driving circuit in field sequential liquid crystal display
TW201914003A (en) Display optimization technology for micro-lighting diode devices and arrays
JP6239552B2 (en) Liquid crystal display
US8558781B2 (en) Color sequential display where each sub-frame is illuminated by a secondary color backlight followed by illumination with the complementary primary color backlight
JP2004004626A (en) Display device
US9363872B2 (en) Display device and method of controlling light source
WO2011036916A1 (en) Display device and display method therefor
JP2007322944A (en) Display control device, display device, and display control method
JP5438217B2 (en) Display signal generator, display device, and image display method
JP2011022481A (en) Liquid crystal display apparatus
JP2008542808A (en) Spectral sequential display with reduced crosstalk
JP2007322945A (en) Display control device, display device, and display control method
US20100117942A1 (en) Liquid crystal display
WO2017077931A1 (en) Color image display device and color image display method
US20110134021A1 (en) Method and apparatus for led driver color-sequential scan
JP2012047827A (en) Image display device
US20040041781A1 (en) Color image display
US20180157120A1 (en) Backlight device and liquid crystal display device provided therewith
JP2010128072A (en) Backlight driving device and backlight driving control method
JP2007334223A (en) Liquid crystal display device
WO2019004072A1 (en) Field-sequential image display apparatus and image display method
WO2016103922A1 (en) Colour image display device, and colour image display method
US10706792B2 (en) Field sequential type display device and display method
US10545374B2 (en) Light source control apparatus, light source control method and display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18825056

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18825056

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP